R
INTRODUCTION
CONTROLS,
CONNECTORS
AND DISPLAY
CAUTION
CONNECTIONS
This section of instruction manual is specially edited for service
purpose with modified contents.
It is not recommended to use, this section for the substitution of
the original book in the merchandise.
MENU SWITCH
SETTING
MENU SWITCH
SETTING
DETAILS
PREPARATION
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
RECORDING
PLAYBACK
INSTRUCTIONS
BR-D95U
OTHER
FUNCTIONS
HOW TO USE
TIME CODE
COMPONENT DIGITAL
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
O
OFF
Variable Motion
EDITING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
MENU
REC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EDITING SYSTEM
PHASE
ADJUSTMENT
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
RS-232C
PROTOCOL
TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
• This manual provides instructions in English and
German.
APPENDIX
R
English :pp. 2 to 151
German:pp. 154 to 174
• To maintain picture and sound quality, use the
exclusive head cleaning cassette after every 20
hours of operation.
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Serial No. which is
located on the rear of cabinet. Retain
this information for future reference.
SPECIFICA -
TIONS
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Model No. BR-D95U
Serial No.
is a registered trademark owned by VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
For details on head cleaning, refer to page 11.
is a registered trademark in Japan, the U.S.A., the U.K. and many other countries.
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Printed in Japan
SL96197-
This instruction book is made from 100% recycled paper.
SL96197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ( FOR EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA )
This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection requirements of the corresponding European
Directives. This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and can be used in the following
environments:
Warning Notice
FOR YOUR SAFETY (Australia)
1. Insert this plug only into effectively earthed three-
pin power outlet.
POWER SYSTEM
Connection to the mains supply
This unit operates on voltage of 110 V to 240 V AC,
50 Hz/60 Hz.
2. If any doubt exists regarding the earthing, consult
a qualified electrician.
3. Extensioncord,ifused,mustbethree-corecorrectly
wired.
Ⅲ Controlled EMC environment (for example purpose built broadcasting or recording studio), and the rural
outdoors environment (far away from railways, transmitters, overhead power lines, etc.)
WARNING:
In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electromagnetic compatibility we recommend to use
cables not exceeding the following length:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Port
Cable
Length
IMPORTANT (In the United Kingdom)
Mains Supply (AC 230 V `)
WARNING – THIS APPARATUS
MUST BE EARTHED
AC INPUT
Power supply cord
Coaxial cable
2.5 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
3 meters
5 meters
5 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
10 meters
3 meters
CAUTION
SERIAL V/A IN
SERIAL V/A OUT
AES/EBU IN, OUT
RS-232C
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code;
GREEN-and-YELLOW: EARTH
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No
user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to
qualified service personnel.
Coaxial cable
BLUE
BROWN
: NEUTRAL
: LIVE
Coaxial cable
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed
as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW
must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
markedwiththeletterEorbythesafetyearthsymbol
or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW. The
wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or which is
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN
must be connected to the terminal which is marked with
the letter L or coloured RED.
Shielded cable
Exclusive cable
Exclusive cable
Coaxial cable
WARNING
REMOTE
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
VIDEO CONTROL
COMPOSITE IN, OUT
REF IN
Coaxial cable
Note:
Y/R-Y/B-Y IN, OUT
TIME CODE IN, OUT
AUDIO IN CH1, CH2
AUDIO OUT CH1, CH2
AUDIO MONITOR
PHONES
Coaxial cable
The rating plate and the safety caution are on the rear
of the unit.
Coaxial cable
Shielded twist pair cable
Shielded twist pair cable
Shielded cable
Cable with headphones
This apparatus is designed in compliance with ISO
7779/1999 (Acoustics -- Measurement of airborne
noise emmited by information technology telecom-
munications equipment), whose acoustic noise is
less than 70 dB.
WARNING
It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re-record
pre-recorded tapes, records, or discs without the
consent of the owner of copyright in the sound or video
recording, broadcast, or cable programme and in any
literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work embodied
therein.
The inrush current of this apparatus is 17 amperes.
Caution
When in case that the strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism is near the audio in ch1, ch2 cable, the sound
CAUTION
will contain noise.
In such case, please keep the cable away from the disturbance.
RED colour indications on the operation panel are
provided but they are not safety related.
RED colour indications:
(1) For Cassette Recording Button
(2) For Level Over Audio In/Out Indicator
(3) For Tape Error Indicator
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing the BR-D95U DIGITAL S
Video Cassette Recorder with electronic editing
capabilities.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ...............................................
1-1 Outline ....................................................
1-2 Maintenance ...........................................
MAIN FEATURES
1
8
8
9
8-7 Simplified Playback Speed
● Superb picture quality achieved by the DIGITAL S
format using 4:2:2 component digital processing
● Independently editable 4-channel PCM high-quality
sound
4-channel PCM high-quality sound with 16-bit 48
kHz sampling. 4-channel audio can be edited
independently.
● High-density metal tape based on the W-VHS
format
● Built-in time code generator/reader to enable
recording and reading of SMPTE/EBU-Standard
time code and user bits
Adjustment Function ............................... 81
8-8 Shuttle Search/Jog Operation................. 82
8-9 Variable Slow Playback .......................... 83
8-10 Program Playback .................................. 85
8-11 FF, REW and Counter Memory
● This unit can be used with either NTSC or PAL
signal systems. Before using this unit, first select
1-3 Precautions ............................................. 10
1-4 Video Cassette ....................................... 11
1-5 Head Cleaning ........................................ 11
the signal system.
The signal system
you select will be
indicated on the
counter display
Signal system indication
525
625
CONDITION
Functions ................................................ 86
2
CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS 12
2-1 Front Panel ............................................. 12
2-2 Sub Panel ............................................... 18
2-3 Rear Panel .............................................. 19
2-4 Counter Display ...................................... 21
2-5 On-screen Display .................................. 23
8-12 Repeat Playback..................................... 86
Counter display
with “525” for NTSC
9
OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................ 87
9-1 Extra Line Data Recording/Playback ...... 87
9-2 EXTRA LINE, VITC LINE, V. BLANK
MASK and PB EXTENSION LINE
and “625” for PAL. For instructions on how to
select the signal system, refer to “4-2 VIDEO
SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION” on page 30.
● The optional SA-D95U digital interface board is
required for input/output of serial digital signals.
● Pre-read function
3
4
CONNECTIONS ................................................ 25
3-1 Input Connections ................................... 25
3-2 Output Connections ................................ 26
3-3 Control System Connections .................. 27
settings ................................................... 89
9-3 Simultaneous Operation ......................... 90
9-4 Fixed Time Cue Up Function .................. 91
9-5 Multi Cue-Up Function ............................ 92
9-6 Striping Rec Function ............................. 94
This function makes it possible to execute A/B roll
editing using only one player (video/audio insert
only).
Whenever (NTSC) or (525) is specified in this
manual, the accompanying information applies only
to the NTSC signal system. Similarly, information
that is specified as (PAL) or (625) applies only to the
PAL signal system.
● Swap editing
The swap control function allows the player VCR to
be controlled from the recorder VCR via 9-pin
remote cable. This allows automatic editing even
when an editing controller is not available.
● Audio split editing
Audio edit start points can be set separately with
the video signal edit start point as a reference.
● Color frame servo function
MENU SWITCH SETTING................................. 28
4-1 Menu Display Modes .............................. 28
4-2 Video Signal System Selection ............... 30
4-3 Menu Switch Setting ............................... 31
4-4 Saving and Calling Up Menu Switch
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE ............................... 96
10-1 Time Code Display ................................. 96
10-2 Time Code Initial Setting (Preset) ........... 97
10-3 Time Code Recording .............................. 99
10-4 Time Code Playback............................. 101
10-5 Sub Time Code Recording and
COMPONENT DIGITAL
Settings ................................................... 32
This video cassette recorder uses the DIGITAL
S format. It can only be used with video tape
4-5 Calling Up Functional Menu Switch (Direct
Access Function) .................................... 33
4-6 User Page Registration/Change/Delete
(User Page Function) .............................. 34
4-7 How to Lock the Menu Switch Settings ..... 37
4-8 Recording Current Adjustment ............... 38
4-9 Hour Meter Data Display ........................ 39
This function ensures that continuity of the color
subcarrier phase is maintained during editing.
● Audio V fade function
Playback ............................................... 102
10-6 Time Code Switch Setting for Editing ... 103
cassettes bearing the “
” or “
COMPONENT DIGITAL
” logo.
11 EDITING........................................................... 104
11-1 Outline .................................................. 104
11-2 Color Frame Servo Setting ................... 105
11-3 Swap Editing......................................... 107
11-4 Audio Split Editing................................. 112
11-5 Other Function ...................................... 113
11-6 Manual Editing ...................................... 114
11-7 Editing with the Pre-read Function........ 115
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT.... 117
12-1 Connection............................................117
12-2 Adjustment ............................................118
12-3 Dubbing Loop Function.......................... 122
13 RS-232C Protcol ............................................. 123
13-1 Command tables................................... 123
13-2 RS-232C commands ............................ 124
13-3 Speed/data correspondence table........ 134
13-4 Contents of the sense commands ........ 135
13-5 Menu switch setting information ........... 137
14 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 145
14-1 Warnings with Indicators....................... 145
14-2 Troubles not to be Warned by
This function fades the audio level during a
transition in V shape to reduce noise.
● Complete analog interface with input/output
terminals for composite, color difference component
and analog audio signals included as standard
● Internally installable serial digital interface board
optionally available for configuration of fully digital
systems
CAUTION: 4-channel audio
insert editing
Do not try to perform audio insert
editing on tapes with 4 audio channels
when using a 2-channel audio DIGITAL
S VCR (BR-D85U/E, BR-D80U/E, BR-
D750U/E).
5
6
MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS ................ 40
5-1 Menu Switch List..................................... 40
5-2 Menu Switch Setting Content ................. 43
PREPARATION ................................................. 65
6-1 Operation Mode Lock ............................. 65
6-2 Standby ON/OFF .................................... 66
6-3 Loading and Unloading the Cassette...... 67
● Jog/search dial
● Built-in noiseless slow playback facility for noiseless
playback within a speed range of approximately
–1 to +1 normal
If audio insert editing is executed,
audio signals recorded on DA3 and
DA4 will be erased.
7
8
RECORDING ..................................................... 68
7-1 Preparation for Recording....................... 68
7-2 Input Video and Audio Signal Selection.. 69
7-3 Audio Monitor Output Signal Selection ... 70
7-4 Audio Record level Adjustment............... 71
7-5 Basic Recording Operations ................... 73
7-6 Digital audio signal input/output .............. 74
● Audio monitor facility for search
The D-9 format provides two linear audio channels,
enabling audio monitoring even during video shuttle
search.
● Tiltable front panel
● Do not record important material in the first two or
three minutes of a tape.
● Playback audio output adjustment function
● Recording audio input adjustment function
● Video output adjustment function
● It may be unlawful to use any material recorded
from TV broadcast programs or pre-recorded
programs without the consent of the owner of
copyright, except in cases where this material is
recorded exclusively for personal use.
● JVC is not liable for compensation for loss or
damage to recordings in the event this unit fails to
record or play back properly because the unit
malfunctions or a defective video cassette tape is
used.
PLAYBACK ....................................................... 75
8-1 Preparation for Playback ........................ 75
8-2 Basic Playback Operations ..................... 76
8-3 Audio Playback Level Adjustment .......... 77
8-4 Manual Tracking Adjustment .................. 79
8-5 Error Correction ...................................... 80
8-6 Audio V.Fade Function ........................... 80
Indicators .............................................. 147
15 APPENDIX....................................................... 148
15-1 Operation button combinations............. 148
15-2 Optional Accessories ............................ 148
15-3 Index ..................................................... 149
● This unit is designed for professional use.
16 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................... 150
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 INTRODUCTION
1 INTRODUCTION
1-1 OUTLINE
1-2 MAINTENANCE
This manual consists of the following sections.
The video cassette recorder/player incorporates precision components. Regular maintenance is necessary to
maintain the performance level required for professional use. The information below will help you determine a
maintenance schedule that will ensure optimum performance over a long period of time.
Section 9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
Section 1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the following special functions.
• Setting the unit to record or play back information
added to a video signal on an extra video line.
• Simultaneous operation of more than one VCR
• Cue-up function
Read this section carefully as it describes the
precautions to be taken when operating this unit
and the type of cassette to be used.
● Maintenance
● Keeping track of operation (running) time
The total operation time reached by an ordinary
home VCR in five to six years may be reached by a
professional VCR in as few as five to six months.
Therefore, it is important to closely monitor the total
operation time. You can check the running time on
the provided hour meter (drum running time). The
hour meter is shown on the counter display or on-
screen display on the monitor.
Just as regular oil changes, brake checks, and
tune-ups are essential to keep your car running well
over a long period, your VCR must be maintained
regularly to ensure optimum long-term
performance.
Section 2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND
DISPLAYS
If you are already familiar with the operation of
professional VCRs, you will probably only need to
read this section to get started.
Section 10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
This section describes time code presetting,
recording, and time code playback operation.
Continued use of the VCR without maintenance
may lead to the following malfunctions.
Section 11 EDITING
This section describes the editing operation and
pre-read editing.
Section 3 CONNECTIONS
This section describes basic connections between
the BR-D95U and other units.
●
●
●
Recording or playback cannot be executed.
Picture and sound distortion.
Hour meter indication
Repeated warnings (stopping the operation).
These malfunctions are mostly due to wear or
deterioration of the VCR's internal components.
Having these repaired can be expensive.
Moreover, a sudden malfunction can not only lead
to downtime and lost productivity, but can also
damage the video cassette.
The hour meter can be displayed by selecting
“DRUM HOUR” on the menu switch setting screen.
For details, refer to “Hour meter indication” on page
39.
Section 12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUST
MENT
This section describes internal TBC phase
adjustment and the dubbing loop function.
Section 4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
This unit incorporates a “Menu” function which
allows you to set a variety of switches on screen.
Setting procedures and setting items are described
in this section.
● Maintenance schedule
Section 13 RS-232C protocol
Depending on the operation time, inspect or
replace the following mechanism components.
Replace the drum assembly (including the heads)
and head cleaner every 750 hours.
This section describes the data protocols used to
control of this unit with a personal computer or
other external RS-232C controller.
Section 5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
This section describes the menu switch items and
setting contents in detail.
Section 14 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section suggests ways to handle potential
difficulties or malfunctions.
Section 6 PREPARATION
ଁ: Cleaning, check and adjustment
⅜: Check or replace as required. If replacement is
not required, clean it.
This section describes how to set up the unit prior
to operation and notes any precautions that need to
be taken.
ⅷ: Replace.
Section 15 APPENDIX
This section includes descriptions of optional units
and the index for this manual.
Section 7 RECORDING
This section describes recording operations and
settings.
Use time
Every 750H
1500H
ⅷ
3000H
ⅷ
4500H
ⅷ
6000H
ⅷ
Drum assembling
(including heads)
Head cleaner
Tape guide roller, etc.
Fixed head
ⅷ
Section 16 SPECIFICATIONS
Section 8 PLAYBACK
This section describes playback operations and
settings.
ⅷ
⅜
ଁ
⅜
⅜
ⅷ
ⅷ
⅜
ⅷ
⅜
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
⅜
ⅷ
ⅷ
⅜
ⅷ
⅜
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Belt pinch roller, etc.
Driving system parts
This table should be used as reference only. Actual maintenance requirements will vary according to how the unit
is used.
Maintenance consultation
Consult your local JVC dealer for more information about maintenance scheduling and costs.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 INTRODUCTION
1 INTRODUCTION
1-3 PRECAUTIONS
1-4 VIDEO CASSETTE
The BR-D95U incorporates highly sophisticated and complex technology. To ensure proper operation, be sure to
take the following precautions.
● Only cassettes bearing the “
used with this VCR.
” logo can be
ⅷCassettes bearing the “
are provided with a safety slide to prevent
accidental erasure.
” logo on the back
● Cassettes bearing the S-VHS or VHS logo cannot be
used with this unit. If an S-VHS or VHS cassette is
inserted, it will be automatically ejected.
● Video cassettes cannot be used upside down.
● Leaving the tape in a partially wound condition for a
long time may damage the tape. Rewind the tape
to the beginning before storage.
● Tape performance cannot be maintained if a
cassette is used repeatedly. The more a tape is
used, the more dropouts occur. Do not use dirty
tapes or tapes which have been damaged as doing
so may shorten the service life of the rotary heads.
Transportation
Condensation
● Move the slide to OFF to prevent erasure.
● Move the slide to ON to allow recording.
Always hold this unit by the side panels when
carrying or moving it. If you hold it by the front panel,
the tilt panel may open and you could drop the unit.
● Do not use this unit immediately after moving it
from a cold place to a warm place or after switching
on a heater in a cold room. This will cause water
vapor to condense on the video head drum and
tape guides and may damage the tape and the
VCR.
Slide
Installation and storage
● Avoid using the unit in places subject to the follow-
Head drum
ing conditions:
●
●
●
●
●
extreme heat or cold
strong magnetic field
high humidity
dust and soil
vibrations
Video tape
Not recordable
Recordable
● Handle the unit carefully
● When condensation occurs, the warning message
“02 1” is shown on the tape counter display. The
cassette is automatically ejected (see page 145).
The head drum then rotates automatically to dry
itself. Leave the VCR in this state with the power
on. Once the warning message “02 1” has turned
off, operation can be resumed.
Do not block the ventilation openings, or place
anything heavy on the unit. Do not put any foreign
materials into the cassette loading slot.
● Use the unit in a horizontal (flat) position only.
● Avoid violent shocks to the recording chassis
during transportation. Remove the cassette tape
from the unit prior to transportation.
● Avoid leaving tapes in the Still or Record Pause
mode for a long time as this may damage the tape.
● When not using the unit, set the [POWER] switch to
“OFF” to avoid unnecessary power consumption.
● Do not stand or sit on the unit. This will damage the
unit and may cause it to fall, resulting in injury.
● Do not install the BR-D95U in a location where it
exposed to radiation, x-rays or corrosive gases.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
POWER
ON
I
1-5 HEAD CLEANING
COMPONENT DIGITAL
OFF
O
Variable Motion
Repeated recording and playback leads to accumulation of dust and other particles on the video and audio heads.
Excessive accumulation will adversely affect the picture or sound quality. If head cleaning is not performed
periodically, a type of mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture or the sound may be interrupted.
Be sure to clean the tape transport system with a dedicated head cleaning tape (optionally available
DCL-5) once every 20 hours.
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
VCON
REMOTE
COUNTER RESET
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
UB
PB
PB/EE
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
STILL
H
M
S
F
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
Maintenance and cleaning
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
STAND BY
REW
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
● This unit contains precision components to ensure
the highest performance. For optimum long-term
performance, proper maintenance and care are
required. Consult your JVC dealer for replacement
of parts, adjustment and servicing.
Use a dedicated head cleaning tape only. For details on use of the dedicated head cleaning tape, refer to the
instructions provided with it.
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
● Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet. Do not use
benzene or thinner as these may melt or cloud the
cabinet surface. To remove excessive dirt, clean
the unit with a mild detergent diluted with water,
then wipe it with a dry cloth.
Block noise
Head Cleaning mode
About the provided power cables
This unit is provided with a built-in head cleaner. Use
it to remove dust from the heads.
Cleaning procedure
1. Unload the cassette.
2. Press the [STANDBY], [REW], [STOP] and [FF]
buttons simultaneously.
The built-in head cleaner in this unit cleans the
heads for about 5 seconds.
Two power cables are provided with the BR-D95U.
Use the one that corresponds to your power-supply.
● When usage voltage is 120 V or less; use the
A-type (flat-pin type) power cable.
● When usage voltage is 127 V or over; use the
C-type (round-pin type) power cable.
STAND BY
REW
FF
STOP
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
● If a cassette is inserted during head cleaning, the
head cleaning operation stops.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-1 FRONT PANEL
2-1 FRONT PANEL
21
20 19
3
2
1
18
17 16 15 14
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
22
23
24
ON
I
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
LINE
CPN
ANALOG
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
R
OFF
O
OFF
O
Variable Motion
Variable Motion
12
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
525
625
CTL TC UB DF SERVO
CF GEN 16:9 AP
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UB
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
STILL
4
5
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X1
X-1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3
REC
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
TC
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
REV
FWD
6
8
9
11 13
7
10
[POWER] switch
When power is ON, the counter display is
illuminated.
[PHONES] jack
[METER MODE] buttons
Ⅲ [TRACKING] tracking meter mode button
● Press this button to switch between CH-4 audio
level meter and tracking meter.
This button lights or blinks when the tracking
meter is selected. Blinking indicates that auto
tracking is OFF. (When setting menu switch No.
005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF”)
Ⅲ [FINE] fine meter mode button
● Press this button to change the display
accuracy of the audio level meter.
When the [FINE] indicator is illuminated, the
meter display is in Fine mode. More precise
level adjustment is possible in this mode.
● Press this button while holding the [SHIFT]
button down. The button blinks and the Program
Play mode is engaged.
* Before engaging the Program Play mode,
engage the Still or Stop mode.
For details, refer to “Program Playback” on page
85.
Connect a set of headphones with a 6 mm-dia.
plug to listen to the audio channel selected with
the [AUDIO MONITOR] button.
Cassette loading slot
S-VHS/VHS tapes cannot be used for either
recording or playback.
[PLAY] audio playback level adjust knobs
Adjust the playback level for each channel (CH1 to
CH4). To adjust the audio playback level, pull out
the audio level adjust knobs. Turn clockwise to
increase the level and counterclockwise to lower it.
When audio level adjust knobs are pushed in, the
Unity mode is engaged. Turning the knobs in this
mode has no effect on the audio level.
There are two ways to adjust playback levels:
One way is to independently adjust playback levels
for each channel (CH1 to CH4 channels); the other
is to use the CH1 or CH3 adjust knob as a master
volume control and the CH2 or CH4 knob as a
balance control. You can select the method you
prefer with menu switch No. 216 <AUD PB
VOLUME MODE1>.
Counter display
Search/jog dials
Turn for search/jog operation.
Usually displays tape time. With the MENU button
pressed, it displays menu switch and hour meter
settings. Displays warning codes when an
The outer dial serves as a search control.
The inner dial serves as a jog control.
● During playback, turn the jog dial while holding
the [PLAY] button down to increase or decrease
the playback speed. Playback speed corre-
sponds to the speed with which you turn the dial.
Turning the dial clockwise allows you to increase
playback speed to up to 2 times normal speed.
Turning it counterclockwise allows you to de-
crease playback speed until tape running stops.
If you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback
speed is restored.
● In the Variable mode, turn the outer search dial
for variable slow playback from -1x to +1x.
● When menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT
SEARCH> is set to “OFF”, hold the [PLAY]
button down and turn the search dial during play
to execute variable slow playback.
abnormality occurs. For details, refer to page 21.
Level meter section
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels.
● The [CH4/TRACKING] meter can be switched
between tracking display and CH4 audio level
display with the [METER MODE TRACKING]
button.
[TRACKING] adjust knob
Manually adjusts tracking during playback.
After setting the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to
Tracking Display mode with the [TRACKING
METER MODE] button, adjust this knob until the
meter swings to the maximum level.
* To manually adjust tracking, set menu switch
No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF (0)”.
● Audio Level Display mode can be selected with
the [METER MODE FINE] button.
● When the audio level adjust mode is set to Unity,
the [P] or [R] indicator in the upper section of the
meter lights. The [P] indicator lights in the Play
Volume mode and the [R] indicator lights in the
Record Volume mode.
When the audio level adjust mode is set to
Variable, the indicator goes out. You can use
the audio level adjust knobs to adjust the levels
in this mode.
● The audio reference level can be set with menu
switch No. 257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV.>
(-20 dB or -18 dB).
[REC] audio recording level adjust knobs
Adjust the recording level for each channel (CH1
to CH4). To adjust the audio recording level, pull
out the audio level adjust knobs. Turn clockwise
to increase the level and counterclockwise to
lower it.
When audio level adjust knobs are pushed in, the
Unity mode is engaged. Turning the knobs in this
mode has no effect on the audio level.
There are two ways to adjust recording levels:
One way is to independently adjust recording
levels for each channel (CH1 to CH4 channels);
the other is to use the CH1 or CH3 adjust knob as
a master volume control and the CH2 or CH4
knob as a balance control. You can select the
method you prefer with menu switch No. 215
<AUD REC VOLUME MODE1>.
[SEARCH] button
● Starts search at the search speed set by the
search dial.
● In the Menu Switch Setting mode, the menu
switch setting can be changed by turning the
jog dial while keeping this button pressed.
● During time code presetting, preset data can be
changed by turning the jog dial while keeping
this button pressed.
● In the Program Playback mode, hold the
[VAR/P.PLAY] button down and turn the inner
jog dial to set the initial speed for program
playback or to vary program playback speed.
● The jog dial is also used to select items when
setting the menu switches or to set data when
presetting the time code.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
● Use this button to change the fixed time cue up
data or the video control adjust parameters.
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
+2
+2
+2
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
[VAR/P.PLAY] button
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
● To engage the Variable mode, press this button.
The button will light when the Variable mode is
engaged. In this mode, you can use the search
dial to control slow-motion playback speed.
Caution
To use the search dial, first set it to the “STILL”
position (with power ON).
[PHONES] headphone level adjust control
Adjusts signal level output from the [PHONES]
jack.
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-1 FRONT PANEL
2-1 FRONT PANEL
LINE: Lights when composite video signal input
(via rear panel's [COMPOSITE LINE IN]
connector) is selected.
CPN: Lights when component video signal input
(via rear panel's [COMPONENT IN]
connector) is selected.
All lit: All indicators light when the signal from the
internal signal generator is selected.
The type of signal can be selected with
menu switch No. 111 “REC SIGNAL
SELECT”.
Blinking: The indicator blinks if no signal is input or
if the wrong type of signal is input.
[PB PB/EE] button
28
25
Press to select the playback (PB) exclusive mode
or PB/EE auto switching mode. The selected mode
is shown by the indicators in the upper section of
the counter display. When the PB/EE Auto
Switching mode is engaged, set the VCR to the EE
mode with menu switch No. 314 <PB/EE MODE>.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
12
27
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
[REMOTE] button
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
Press to select remote/local operation. When
remote operation is selected, “REMOTE” is shown
in the upper section of the counter display. In the
“REMOTE” mode, the unit can be operated via the
remote controller connected to the rear panel’s
[REMOTE IN (9P)] or [RS-232C] connector. On
the VCR itself, only the [STAND BY], [STOP] and
[EJECT] buttons will remain operable.
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
SET
HOLD
MENU
REC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
REC
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT]
indicators
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Show whether the input or monitor audio signal is
selected. Press the [AUDIO INPUT] button or
[AUDIO MONITOR] button to switch between
the input or monitor indication.The channel
indicator blinks if the selected signal does not
conform to the standard.
Along with the input indication, the type of signal
(SDI, AES/EBU or ANALOG) is shown. With the
monitor indication, the audio channel (CH1, CH2,
CH3, or CH4) output to the monitor output L or R
channel is shown.The channels can be switched
with the audio signal select buttons. When
these three indicators (SDI, AES/EBU, ANALOG)
are lit simultaneously, audio signals (1 kHz sine
wave) from the built-in signal generator are
selected. The signals from the built-in signal
generator can be either 1 kHz audio signals or no
sound. This is selectable with menu switches
(No. 253 to No. 256).
To operate the VCR locally, that is with its
operation buttons, press the [REMOTE] button so
that the “REMOTE” indicator goes out.
26
29
[VCON] button
Press to adjust the video/audio parameters.
Adjustable items are shown on the counter display.
Turn the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH]
button to make adjustments.
Setting buttons
Ⅲ [MENU] button
Operation buttons
● All buttons are illuminated when pressed.
● The labels printed under the operation buttons
indicate the menu items displayed when the
button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting
(Direct Access) mode.
Ⅲ [EJECT] button
● Press to eject the cassette.
● TOP menu switch items are displayed when
this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
Ⅲ [REC] button
● Engages the Record mode when pressed
together with the [PLAY] button.
● Press this button to enter the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
You can adjust the video parameters by connecting
an optional video controller to the rear panel’s
[VIDEO CONTROL] connector. (See page 118.)
Press this button again to switch back to the
Counter Display mode.
Ⅲ [SET] button
[RESET] button
● Press this button to store menu switch setting
Press to reset the CTL counter to “0:00:00:00”.
The time code and user bits cannot be reset.
When the edit points have been set, these
settings are canceled.
data in the VCR’s memory.
● Press this button to preset data in the time code
generator.
● Use this button to end video parameter
adjustment or to use the counter memory
function.
When setting the fixed time cue up, press this
button to reset the counter to “00:00:00:00”. For
details, refer to “Fixed Time Setting” on page 91.
When the input audio signal indication is selected,
these indicators blink if no SDI or AES/EBU signal
is input. SDI and AES/EBU can only be selected
when the optional SA-D95U digital interface board
is installed.
Ⅲ [HOLD] button
● To monitor the EE picture during playback,
press and hold this button.
[COUNTER] button
● Press this button to preset data in the time code
Press to switch the counter between CTL counter,
time code, or user bits display. Press this button while
pressing the [SHIFT] button to display user bits.The
selected counter display mode is shown by the
indicators in the upper section of the counter display.
CTL: CTL counter display
generator. To preset time code, the [COUNTER]
switch must be set at “TC”. To preset user bits, the
[COUNTER] switch must be set at “UB”.
* This button is effective only when the [INT/EXT]
switch on the time code setting section is set to
“INT” and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set
to “PRESET”.
● Press this button in the Stop mode to check
preset data in the time code generator.
Ⅲ [PLAY] button
● Press to start playback. If pressed together with
the [REC] button, recording will start.
● Video menu switch items are displayed when
this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
● When menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT
SEARCH> is set to “OFF”, hold this button
down and turn the search dial during play to
perform variable slow playback.
● By turning the jog dial while pressing this button
in the Play mode, you can vary playback speed
between 0 (Still) and +2 (double-speed) Refer
to “Simplified playback speed adjustment
function” on page 84.
[AUDIO INPUT] button
Press to select the input audio signal for the
[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT]
indicators. The button illuminates when selected.
TC: Time code display
UB: User bits display
Input video signal button
Press to select input video signals. The selected
video signal is shown by the [VIDEO INPUT]
indicators.
SIF can only be selected when the optional
SA-D95U digital interface board is installed.
A menu switch is provided to prevent
misoperation. Refer to the menu switch setting for
No. 371 “INPUT SELECT SAFETY”.
[VIDEO INPUT] indicators
Show the type of video signal selected with the
input video signal switch.
SIF: Lights when serial video signal input (via rear
panel's [SERIAL V/A IN] connector) is
selected.
[AUDIO MONITOR] button
Press to select the monitor audio signal for the
[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT]
indicators. The button illuminates when selected.
Audio signal select buttons
Press to select the input audio signal or monitor
audio signal.
The selected audio signal is shown by the
[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT]
indicators.
● In the Program Playback mode, hold the
[VAR/P.PLAY] button down and press this
button to execute program playback.
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-1 FRONT PANEL
2-1 FRONT PANEL
Ⅲ [PAUSE/STILL]
● Pressing this button together with the [PLAY]
button during playback increases playback
speed slightly to 1.07 times normal speed.
● The drum hour meter is displayed when this
button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting
mode.
● Engages the Pause mode when pressed during
recording. Press the [PLAY] button to resume
recording.
● Engages the Still mode when pressed in the
Play, Search or Stop (Standby On/Off) modes.
Press the [PLAY] button to resume playback.
● Audio menu switch items are displayed when
this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
Player/recorder select button
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
Selects the player or recorder in swap editing.
Press the [PLAYER] button to operate the player
and the [RECORDER] button to operate the
recorder. The button corresponding to the
selected unit will be illuminated.
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
Ⅲ [STANDBY] button
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
● Switches the Standby mode between ON and
OFF in the Stop mode. The button is
illuminated in the Standby On mode.
● The head drum continues to rotate when the
Standby mode is on. This enables the unit to
quickly switch modes when another function is
engaged. The head drum does not rotate when
the Standby mode is off. This protects the
cassette tape and heads from damage.
● Servo and system menu switch items are
displayed when this button is pressed in the
Menu Switch Setting mode.
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
(Refer to menu switch No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP
MODE> on page 58.)
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Editing mode select buttons
Use to select assemble editing or insert editing
(VIDEO, DA-1 to DA4, TC). Set before preview or
actual editing.
[ASSEM] button: Press to execute assemble
editing. VIDEO, DA1 to DA4 and TC are all
recorded.
[INSERT] buttons: Press these buttons according
to the signal(s) you want to insert.
● A signal corresponding with an illuminated
button is “ON”. A signal corresponding with a
non-illuminated buttons is “OFF”.
● You cannot select both assemble and insert
editing. Pressing the [ASSEM] button
automatically switches OFF the [INSERT]
button and vice versa.
● Each of the [INSERT] buttons can be set to ON/
OFF during insert editing.
● The [DA1] to [DA4] audio insert buttons blink
when the audio edit IN point for the audio split
editing has been registered.
● The [ASSEM] button cannot be set to ON/OFF
during assemble editing.
30 31 32 33
Edit point setting buttons
[PREVIEW] button
Use these buttons to register, erase, correct and
check edit points.
Ⅲ [IN] edit IN button
Press to start editing rehearsal. this button will
light. During preview editing, you can press this
button again if you want to restart the preview. To
review an edit, press this button together with the
[SHIFT] button.
Ⅲ [REW] button
● Press this button to rewind the tape. The
maximum rewind speed during rewind can be
selected with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW
MAX SPEED>.
● Output mode during rewinding can be selected
with menu switch No. 314 <PB/EE MODE>
(with the [PB PB/EE] button set to PB/EE Auto
Switching mode).
● Pressing this button together with the [PLAY]
button during playback slows playback speed
slightly to 0.93 times normal speed.
● Time code menu switch items are displayed
when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
Use this button to enter the edit IN point and
show it on the counter display. Press this
button and the [OUT] button simultaneously to
display the duration of an edit. When the edit IN
point is entered, this button lights.
While pressing this button, turn the jog dial
clockwise to shift the IN point in the forward
direction or turn it counterclockwise to shift the
IN point in the reverse direction.
[AUTO EDIT] button
Press to start auto editing. This button will light.
Press this button while pressing the [SHIFT]
button to execute a last edit.
[PREROLL] button
Press this button when the tape is at the position
where you want recording to start after preroll.
The tape will be rewound from the point where
you press this button for the preroll duration set
with the menu switch No.320 “PREROLL TIME”.
During preroll operation, this button lights and
goes out when the preroll operation ends.
If an edit IN point has been already entered,
preroll is based on the edit IN point.
Ⅲ [ENTRY] button
Press this button while pressing the [IN] or
[OUT] button to enter the edit IN point or OUT
point.
[SHIFT] button
Ⅲ [OUT] edit OUT button
Ⅲ [STOP] button
While pressing this button down, press the
[VAR/P.PLAY] button to start program playback.
While pressing this button, press the
[PREVIEW] button to execute the review
operation of editing.
While pressing this button, press the
[PREROLL] button to execute the fixed time cue
up operation. For details, refer to “Fixed Time
Cue Up” on page 91.
Press the [AUTO EDIT] button while pressing this
button to execute a “last edit”.
For other operation button combinations using the
[SHIFT] button, refer to “Operation button
combinations” on page 148.
Use this button to enter the edit OUT point and
show it on the counter display. Press this
button and the [IN] button simultaneously to
display the duration of an edit. When the edit
OUT point is entered, this button lights.
While pressing this button, turn the jog dial
clockwise to shift the OUT point in the forward
direction or turn it counterclockwise to shift the
OUT point in the reverse direction.
● Press this button to stop any operation. The
Output mode in this state can be selected with
[PB PB/EE] button.
● On-screen menu switch items are displayed
when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode.
When this button is pressed in the Menu Switch
Setting mode, the menu switch items registered
for the user menu are shown.
Ⅲ [FF] button
● Press this button to fast-forward the tape. The
maximum fast-forward speed can be selected
with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW MAX
SPEED>. The Output mode during fast-forward
can be selected with menu switch No. 314 <PB/
EE MODE> (with the [PB PB/EE] button set to
PB/EE Auto Switching mode).
Ⅲ [CANCEL] button
Press this button while pressing the [IN] or
[OUT] button to cancel the edit IN or OUT point.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-2 SUB PANEL
2-3 REAR PANEL
8
The sub panel can be accessed by opening the operation panel. To open the operation panel, refer to the figure
9
7
6
below.
34
TIME CODE
AUDIO IN
CH1
AUDIO OUT
CH1
IN
VIDEO
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
IN
REF
RS-232C
1
75
ON
TIME CDOE
DF
INT FREE PRESET
OFF
OUT
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
Y
Y
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
NDF EXT REC REGEN
OFF
8
ON
RF
HID
GND
R-Y
R-Y
B-Y
LINE1
AES EBU
/
36
IN
CH1/2
OUT
ON
CF
4
OFF
SERVICE USE ONLY
CH1/2
(625) ON SCREEN
L
B-Y
LINE2
SUPER
CH3/4
CH3/4
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
OUT
COMPOSITE
R
38
37 35
AUDIO MONITOR
[TIME CODE] switches
Ⅲ [DF/NDF] drop frame/non-drop frame mode
switch (NTSC only)
● To set the time code drop frame/non-drop
frame.
● For the NTSC signal system, the [4/8] switch is
disabled.
* To set the color frame servo with these
switches, set menu switch No. 008 <CAP
LOCK> to “SW SEL”. (See page 105)
1
2
3
4
5
[AC IN] socket
Connect to an AC power outlet via the provided
power cable.
● When usage voltage is 120 V or less; use the
A-type (flat-pin type) power cable.
● When usage voltage is 127 V or over; use the
C-type (round-pin type) power cable.
[TIME CODE IN] connector ... XLR
* Effective only when the [INT/EXT] switch is set
to “INT” and the [PRESET] switch is set to
“PRESET”.
DF: To write the time code in the Drop Frame
mode. The [DF] indicator lights on the
counter display.
NDF: To write the time code in the Non-drop
Frame mode.
Ⅲ [INT/EXT] time code select switch
● To select internal or external time code
generation.
INT: To use the internal time code generator.
EXT: To use an external time code generator.
Ⅲ REC/FREE Run mode select switch
● To select one of two Run modes available with
the internal time code generator.
* Effective only when the [PRESET/REGEN]
switch is set to “PRESET” and the [INT/EXT]
switch to “INT”.
REC: Time code runs only during recording.
FREE: Time code runs in real time regardless of
the VCR’s operating mode. Select this
position for editing.
● Accepts external LTC time code signals
conforming to the SMPTE/EBU standard.
Connect this connector to an external time code
generator. A signal containing a large amount of
jitter cannot be used for LTC time code. Be
sure to use a regenerated signal (stable signal
matched with the phase of video signals).
[ON SCREEN] select switch
Use to switch the on-screen menu ON/OFF. The
on-screen information is output from the [LINE-2
SUPER] connector.
* If menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> is
set to “ON”, you cannot turn the on-screen
display off. (See page 24)
[SIGNAL GND] ground terminal
This terminal is a GND for signals among unit.
[REF IN] external sync signal input connector/
75 terminating switch (loop-through) .... BNC
● Accepts external reference sync signals.
Because of its loop-through design, this
connector can distribute signals to other units
through the opposite terminal. Set the
terminating switch to OFF when distributing
signals. If signal distribution is not desired or is
terminated at this unit, set the switch to ON.
● Does not accept signals with an input level over
1 Vp-p.
Service connectors
[RF] ... RF test signal output connector
[HID] ... Trigger signal output connector
[G] ... Ground connector
[AES/EBU IN] connector .... BNC x 2
Accepts digital audio interface standard (AES/
EBU) digital audio signals.
These signals cannot be input if the optional
SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed.
Always input external sync signals when inputting
digital signals. Both video and audio must be
synchronized with the external sync signal.
[SERVICE USE ONLY] connector
Used to diagnose malfunctions and for other
service procedures.
How to open the operation panel
* When setting up an editing system, input a
black burst or standard color signal to
this unit. The [GEN] indicator will light.
When the serial digital inputs and outputs of
several VCRs are connected in series, do not
input the same signal to each VCR as they
may not be input correctly. Digital audio
signals, in particular, will not be input correctly
to the next VCR in the series.
● Lift the bottom edge of the panel to open it.
The operation panel can be locked in 6 steps in
the range of 0 to 90˚.
[COMPOSITE IN] connectors
[LINE IN] video line input connector ...BNC
● Accepts composite video signals.
Input composite signals passed through the
TBC.
Ⅲ PRESET/REGEN select switch
● To select the Internal Time Code Generator
mode.
* Effective only when the [INT/EXT] switch is set
to “INT”.
[Y.R-Y.B-Y IN] component signal input
connector .... BNC x 3
[SERIAL V/A IN] connectors ... BNC
● Accepts component video signals.
Set menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP
(525)> to select MII (LOW), Bcam (HIGH) and
the presence of setup signals (NTSC only).
The default setting is Bcam with setup.
PRESET: Select this mode to preset time code
data.
REGEN: Select this mode when using the internal
time code generator in sync with a
playback time code signal.
● Accepts serial video/audio signals. The lower
connector is an active loop through connector.
If the VCR is not turned on, no signal will be output.
Serial signals cannot be input if the optional
SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed.
Always input external sync signals when inputting
digital signals. Both video and audio must be
synchronized with the external sync signal.
Lock release lever
Lock release lever
[CF] color frame servo switches
Use to switch the color frame servo ON/OFF.
● For the PAL signal system, select the 4 or 8
field color frame servo with the [4/8] switch on
the side.
[AUDIO IN] connector .... XLR x 4
● Accepts analog audio signals.
● Set the input level with menu switches No. 224
to 227 <AUDIO IN LEVEL>. The factory setting
is +4 dB.
● To return the panel to its original position, pull the
lock release levers in the direction shown by the
arrows and push down the panel.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-4 COUNTER DISPLAY
2-3 REAR PANEL
17
16
14
15
Menu setting display
2
3
1
Tape counter
TIME CODE
IN
AUDIO IN
CH1
AUDIO OUT
CH1
[MENU]
button
VIDEO
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
CTL
CONDITION
IN
REF
RS-232C
1
75
ON
[SHIFT]+[COUNTER]
buttons
H
M
S
F
OFF
OUT
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
Y
Y
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
H
M
S
F
User bits
R-Y
R-Y
B-Y
LINE1
AES EBU
/
IN
CH1/2
OUT
CH1/2
UB
CONDITION
L
B-Y
LINE2
SUPER
Jog dial
[COUNTER] button
CH3/4
CH3/4
H
M
S
F
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
OUT
COMPOSITE
Time code
R
[COUNTER]
button
or
[SHIFT]+[COUNTER]
buttons
TC
CONDITION
Hour meter display
AUDIO MONITOR
H
M
S
F
H
M
S
F
10
12
13
11
When the VCR malfunctions
Warning display
[AUDIO OUT] connectors
● Output analog audio signals.
● The output level can be set with menu switches
No. 228 to 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL>. Factory
setting is +4 dB.
[VCON] button
[AES/EBU OUT] connector ... BNC x 2
● Outputs digital audio interface standard (AES/
EBU) digital audio signals.
Digital signals cannot be output if the optional
SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed.
Video control display
4
5
[TIME CODE OUT] connector ... XLR
[Y.R-Y.B-Y. OUT] component signal output
connector ... BNC x 3
● Outputs the component video signal.
Set menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP
(525)> to select MII (LOW), Bcam (HIGH) and
the presence of setup signals (NTSC only).
The default setting is Bcam with setup.
● Outputs a time code signal to the external time
code generator. LTC time code conforming to
the SMPTE/EBU standard can be output.
Outputs a time code signal during search if menu
switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC> is set to ON (1).
H
M
S
F
H
M
S
F
1. Tape counter display
3. Hour meter data display
Hour meter data (drum operation time) can be
displayed in the Menu Switch Setting mode. For
details, refer to “Hour meter data display” on
page 39.
The display usually serves as a tape time counter
(hours, minutes, seconds, frames). CTL counter,
time code or user bits can be selected with the
front panel [COUNTER] switch. “NO TAPE” is
displayed if a cassette has not been loaded.
● The Menu Switch Setting mode is entered when
the [MENU] button is pressed.
Control connectors
Ⅲ [RS-232C] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin
Connect equipment conforming to the RS-232C
interface standard such as a personal computer.
Ⅲ [REMOTE IN (9P)] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin
Connect an RS-422 serial editing remote control
unit.
Ⅲ [REMOTE OUT (9P)] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin
Connect a VCR with RS-422 serial interface.
Connect to the other VCR’s [REMOTE IN]
connector to operate it from this VCR.
Ⅲ [VIDEO CONTROL] connector ... D-Sub 15-pin
Use to adjust the built-in TBC from an optional
video remote controller (Sony's BVR-50).
[COMPOSITE OUT] connectors
Ⅲ [LINE 1] connector
Outputs composite video signals.
Ⅲ [LINE 2 - SUPER] connector
Outputs composite video signals. When the
[ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel is set
to “ON”, the time counter indication, operating
mode, etc. is superimposed on the screen
image. The menu switch items are shown in the
Menu Switch Setting mode.
Adjustment parameters and current settings are
displayed on screen when the video parameters
are being adjusted.
4. Video/audio control display.
Shows video and audio control adjustment items.
Select with the jog dial. Pressing the [VCON]
button restores the Tape Counter Display mode.
How to reset the CTL counter
● Pressing the [RESET] button resets the CTL
counter to “0:00:00:00”. Time codes and user
bits cannot be reset.
● The CTL counter is also reset to “0:00:00:00”
when the cassette is ejected.
5. Warning code display
If a malfunction occurs, the corresponding warning
code is automatically displayed. For details, refer
to “Warnings with Indicators” on page 145.
[SERIAL V/A OUT] connector ... BNC x 2
Outputs serial video/audio signals. When menu
switch No. 237 <EMBEDDED AUDIO> is set to
“OFF”, digital audio signals are not output.
When connecting to a VCR which is not equipped
to handle EMBEDDED AUDIO, set to “OFF”.
No signals are output if the optional SA-D95U
digital interface board is not installed.
[AUDIO MONITOR] connectors
2. Menu switch setting display
To select menu functions and perform menu
switch setting.
Menu functions and menu switch items can be
changed with the jog dial. See page 31 “Menu
Switch Setting” for details.
● Outputs the audio signal selected with the front
panel's [AUDIO MONITOR] button and audio
signal select buttons.
● The output level can be set with menu switches
No. 232 to 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL>. Factory
setting is +4 dB.
● The counter display shows symbols and
numbers.
● Pressing the [MENU] button restores the Tape
Counter Display mode.
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-4 COUNTER DISPLAY
2-5 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Indicator section
1. Tape counter display, etc.
On-screen display
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO
CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
On-screen information is available only via the rear
panel [LINE 2 - SUPER OUT] connector.
Video/audio control display
[VCON] button * For adjustment of each item, refer to
“Video control adjustment” on page 118.
H
M
S
F
1. Tape counter display
● Shows data when the [ON SCREEN] switch on
the sub panel is set to ON.
● You can choose what information is shown with
menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION
SELECT>.
PLAY
The following error messages may be
displayed during swap editing.
Indication
CTL
TC
UB
DF
Meaning when lit
R: TCR 00:00:00:01
The CTL counter is shown.
The time code is shown.
The user bits are shown.
The CTL counter or time code is in the
drop-frame mode. (525)
Player/recorder
TC read-out mode
indication
Indication
Meaning
Menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT>
Only time data is displayed when “TIME (0)” is
selected.
SUB read-out mode
Local
The player’s Local/
Remote is set to “Local”.
Both time data and VCR operation mode are
displayed when “TIME & MODE (1)” is selected.
● The display position can be shifted horizontally
with menu switch No. 501 <CHARA
H.POSITION> and vertically with No. 502
<CHARA V.POSITION>.
● Set the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel
to OFF to turn off the on-screen display.
* If menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN>
is set to “ON”, you cannot turn the on-screen
display off.
Operation mode
STOP
00:00:00:00
SUB TCR
TCR 00:00:00:00
No Tape
No cassette is loaded in
the VCR.
SERVO
CF
Servo is stable.
Sub time code
Counter
The color frame servo is set. This
indication lights during recording. When
the [CF] switch is ON and a tape with color
frame information is played back, this
indication also lights.
When the PLAYER is selected during
SWAP editing, the [CF] indication does not
light.
Bump Error Bump error occurs.
Counter mode
No Edit Cmd The edit mode is not
selected.
Counter mode
CTL : CTL data
TCR : Time code reader data
Dur = 0 Duration is set to 0.
Servo Error Servo error occurs.
TC1 : Time code reader data (when the first field is played back)*
TC2 : Time code reader data (when the second field is played
back)*
Split No A.
The audio insert mode is
not selected.
GEN
(Blinking) GEN
Signals are input to the [REF] connector.
TCR• : CTL interpolation mode
● When menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION
SELECT> is set to “TIME + SUB TC” or “TIME +
SUB TC + MODE”, sub time code information is
shown simultaneously on a different line.
Rec Inh
Recording is not possible
on this cassette.
The input digital audio signals cannot be
recorded correctly because no external
sync signal is input.
TCG : Time code generator data
UBR : User bits reader data
UBG : User bits generator data
LTC : LTC data
IN/OUT Rev The IN and OUT points
are reversed in terms of
the timeline.
16:9
AP
Wide aspect ID signal is being played back.
A non-D-9 tape is played back.
* Shown when the tape speed is less than 0.3x.
2. Menu switch setting display
Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu
setting display on screen.
● Select a menu item by turning the jog dial. For
details, refer to “Menu switch setting” on
page 31.
Player/recorder indication
Over 300%
Tape speed is more than
3x.
AUTO OFF
P. READ
V. VAR
A malfunction or abnormality has occurred.
The VCR is in the Pre-read mode.
The video parameters can be adjusted.
The PB/EE Auto Switching mode is
selected.
The PB mode is selected.
When the editing screen display is not shown during swap editing,
this indicates which VCR's data is currently displayed on the tape
counter.
P:When the player is selected (SUBTC is not shown)
R:When the recorder or both the recorder and player are selected.
Over -200% Reverse tape speed is
more than -2x.
PB/EE
● Pressing the [MENU] button restores the normal
display.
VTR No Play The VCR will not
function.During editing,
the VCR stops.
Drop-frame display (NTSC only)
In recording or playback in the Drop-frame
mode, the counter display is as shown below.
PB
3. Hour meter data display
REMOTE
CONDITION
The VCR is in the Remote mode.
Hour meter data can be displayed in the Menu
Switch Setting mode. For details, refer to “Hour
meter data display” on page 39.
AuCondition Editing was interrupted
because of audio
·
TCR 00:00:00 00
Channel condition is normal.
Minor errors.
Major errors. Normal playback is not
possible.
conditions deteriorated.
Drop frame indication
4. Warning code display
NO CTL
Stops the operation when
insert editing is executed
in a non-recorded
section.
If a malfunction occurs, the corresponding warning
code is automatically displayed.
For details, refer to “Warnings with Indicators” on
page 145.
3. Hour meter data display
2. Menu setting display
002:OPERATION LOCK
DH:DRUM HOUR METER
0002
(Blinking)
Tracking is not correct.
OFF
003:SYNC SELECT
AUTO
005:AUTO TRACKING
008:CAP LOCK(525)
5. Tape remaining time display
When menu switch No. 505 <REMAIN ENABLE>
is set to “ENABLE(1)”, tape remaining time is
shown in 6 steps.
ON
Video signal system
●
●
Press the [STOP] button to release
SW SEL
4
525
625
The NTSC signal system is set.
The PAL signal system is set.
error display indications.
“No Tape” indication goes out when a
cassette tape is loaded.
009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.
ACCELERATION
4
The video signal system can be set with menu switch No. D95
<525/625> (on the top menu). After selecting the video signal
system, turn this unit OFF then ON again to switch to the
selected video signal system.
E Ⅵ Ⅵ Ⅵ Ⅵ F
Remaining time of 15 minutes or more
Remaining time of less than 15 minutes
Remaining time of less than10 minutes
Remaining time of less than 5 minutes
Remaining time of less than 2 minutes
Remaining time of less than 1 minutes
The remaining time is being calculated.
4. Warning display
5. Tape remaining time display
F
F
F
F
F
E Ⅵ Ⅵ Ⅵ
E Ⅵ Ⅵ
E Ⅵ
WARNING 02
1
CONDENSATION ON DRUM
* During swap editing, player information is shown only by the
E Ⅵ (blinking)
indicators in the
section when the player is selected. The [AUTO
E
(blinking)
PLAY
CTL 0:00:00:00
E
F
OFF] indicator always shows recorder information.
No indication
22
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 CONNECTIONS
2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS
2-5 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
3-1 INPUT CONNECTIONS
[SERIAL V/A IN] [COMPOSITE IN]
[TIME CODE IN]
Operation mode display in the Variable-
motion mode
Editing screen display
[REF]
Player operation mode
Editing mode
Recorder operation mode
Operation mode
AUDIO IN
CH1
AUDIO OUT
CH1
TIME CODE
IN
●-1.0 times slow-motion
playback: VAR -1.0
●-1.5 times slow-motion
playback: !VAR -1.5
VIDEO
V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
IN
REF
Tape remain
P:STOP
CTL
0:01:48:00
R:SHTL STIL
RS-232C
1
75
ON
CTL
E
F
Player
Recorder current time
-0:00:51:03
current time
OFF
P
OUT
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
Y
Y
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
Audio
IN
OUT
R
'
0:01:48:00
0:01:31:04
SPLIT
:15:01
Player edit point
sprit time
-
R-Y
R-Y
B-Y
LINE1
AES EBU
/
IN
CH1/2
OUT
CH1/2
IN
'
0:00:00:00
0:00:43:04
DUR.
Duration
Recorder edit point
L
:43:04 OUT'
B-Y
LINE2
SUPER
CH3/4
Edit point registration
indications:
CH3/4
CTL -0:00:00:01
+030
R
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
P
R
Show edit points
COMPOSITE
R
registered by pressing
the [ENTRY] button.
Noiseless slow-motion playback is available at
speeds of -1.0 to +1.0 times normal.
Variable mode
tape speed
AUDIO MONITOR
● Variable-motion playback at speeds outside this range
(from -1.0 times to +1.0 times) results in a distorted
picture.
● Tape remain is shown when the remaining time is less
than 25 minutes (approx.).
● This display automatically appears whenever an editing-
related button is pressed (such as selecting the edit mode).
(With menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> set to
“ON”)
● When menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> is set
to “ON”, press the [STANDBY] + [SHIFT] to switch the
edit screen ON/OFF.
● When variable-motion playback is performed at speeds
outside the range from -1.0 times to +1.0 times, “!”
appears with the operation mode on the on-screen
display.
[AES/EBU IN]
[COMPONENT IN]
[AUDIO IN]
[SERIAL V/A IN]
Digital signal synchronization
Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to
input signals to this connector.
MUTING/CONDITION ALARM display
The input digital signal must be synchronized with the
video signals. To do this, input sync signals to the
digital signal output unit and the [REF] connector of
this unit.
The “MUTING” or “CONDITION ALARM” can be shown on screen to make it easy to check VCR operating status
on the monitor connected to the [LINE 2- SUPER OUT] connector.
[AUDIO IN]
Set the audio input reference level with menu
switches No. 224 to 227 <AUDIO IN LEVEL>.
Ⅲ To display MUTING/CONDITION ALARM on screen, set menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE>
to “ON (1)”.
This can also be displayed even when setting the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel to OFF.
Reference sync signal
[COMPONENT IN]
Accepts component video signals.
MUTING display
CONDITION ALARM display
The servo system of this unit automatically selects
the reference signal as shown in the table below
depending on the setting of the menu switch and the
operation.
● This unit outputs black signals from the built-in
signal generator via the <LINE 2 - SUPER OUT>
connector.
• In Record or EE mode:
When no video signal is input or input signals do not
contain a sync signal
If video head output (error rate) is degraded during
playback, the “CONDITION ALARM” is shown on
screen.
[AES/EBU IN]
Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to
input signals to this connector.
Monitor screen
Input sync signal
Setting of menu
[TIME CODE IN]
• In Play mode:
switch N. 003
<SYNC SELECT>
When there are no recorded signals (no control signal
recorded) on the tape being played back (With menu
switch No. 120 <NO CTL MUTING> set to “ON”)
● When the input signal is a black signal or when a
tape on which a black signal is recorded is played
back, the monitor’s screen will be black.
To differentiate between the types of black screen
described above, “MUTING” appears on the screen
when the black screen is due to black signals output
from the built-in signal generator.
To record the time code input from this connector, set
the [INT/EXT] switch on the sub panel to “EXT” and
menu switch No. 409 <EXT REGEN TC> to “LTC”.
Operation
CONDITION ALARM
Video input [REF] input
Recording
Playback
Recording
Playback
r
r
r
R
r
AUTO
EXT
(Menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE> set to “ON
(1)”)
● When the “CONDITION ALARM” is displayed,
perform manual tracking adjustment or cleaning
with the dedicated head cleaning tape.
R
r
: Synchronizes (highest priority)
: Synchronizes.
Monitor screen
: Does not synchronize. • If video input and [REF] input are not available,
internal sync is performed.
MUTING
Error rate degradation can also be checked with
the [CHANNEL CONDITION] indicator on the
front panel (refer to page 22).
(Menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE> set to “ON (1)”)
24
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 CONNECTIONS
3 CONNECTIONS
3-2 OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
3-3 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
[SERIAL V/A OUT]
[TIME CODE OUT]
[RS-232C]
[REMOTE IN (9P)]
AUDIO OUT
CH1
TIME CODE
IN
AUDIO IN
CH1
AUDIO OUT
CH1
TIME CODE
IN
AUDIO IN
CH1
VIDEO
VIDEO
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
IN
REF
IN
REF
RS-232C
RS-232C
1
1
75
75
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OUT
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
OUT
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
Y
Y
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
Y
Y
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
R-Y
R-Y
B-Y
LINE1
R-Y
R-Y
B-Y
LINE1
AES EBU
/
AES EBU
/
IN
CH1/2
OUT
IN
OUT
CH1/2
CH1/2
CH1/2
L
L
B-Y
LINE2
SUPER
B-Y
LINE2
SUPER
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
OUT
COMPOSITE
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
OUT
COMPOSITE
R
R
AUDIO MONITOR
AUDIO MONITOR
[COMPONENT OUT]
[VIDEO CONTROL]
[AES/EBU OUT]
[REMOTE OUT (9P)]
[AUDIO OUT]
[COMPOSITE OUT]
[AUDIO MONITOR]
[SERIAL V/A OUT]
[COMPONENT OUT]
[REMOTE IN (9P)]
Editing remote control connection
Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to
output signals from this connector.
● All video parameter settings except SCH phase can
be adjusted. (See page 119.)
Set the component output level with menu switch No.
104 <COMPONENT LEVEL>.
● All video parameter settings except SCH phase can
be adjusted. (See page 119.)
Connect an editing control for the RS-422 serial
interface.
● Set the editing timing to -7 frames from the editing
remote control.
● The preroll time should be set to 5 seconds or
more.
● When using the RM-G820U or RM-G870U editing
remote controller, execute the editing controller's
learn function before operating. Otherwise, the
number of retries will be increased.
● When the RM-G820 remote controller is connected
to this unit, set the menu switch No. 317 < 9PIN
DEVICE ID > to “JVC D80”. The remote controller’s
edit timing is automatically set to -7 frames.
Editing controller menu setting switches are available.
Menu switch No. 359 <JOG FEELING>
Menu switch No. 363 <CONTROLLER SELECT>
To control more than one VCR at the same time, set
menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON”.
[AUDIO OUT]
Set the audio output reference level with menu
switches No. 228 to 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL>.
[AES/EBU OUT]
Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to
output signals from this connector.
[RS-232C]
[TIME CODE OUT]
Select the time code output method during search
with menu switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC>.
Connect to an RS-232C interface in a personal
computer or other control unit.
[REMOTE OUT (9P)]
[AUDIO MONITOR]
Set the audio output reference level with menu
switches No. 232 and 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL>.
Connect another VCR with an RS-422 interface. You
will be able to control the other VCR from this unit.
To control more than one VCR at the same time,
connect this connector to a [REMOTE IN] connector
of the subsequent VCR.
[COMPOSITE OUT]
● On-screen data is output only to the [LINE 2 -
SUPER] connector.
[VIDEO CONTROL]
● Select the main time code or sub time code to
output VITC with menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT
SELECT>.
Connect an optional TBC remote control to operate
the built-in TBC video controls. The RM-G22U
cannot be connected.
When adjusting with a video controller, press the
[VCON] button to select “Remote” and activate the
settings. (Refer to “EDITING SYSTEM PHASE
ADJUSTMENT” on page 117.)
● Video parameters can be adjusted. (See page 119.)
26
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
Besides the physical switches on the unit, a selection of MENU switches are provided. These can be displayed on
the counter display or a connected monitor. Data set in the MENU switches are stored in the VCR’s built-in
nonvolatile memory and are not erased even when the main power is turned off.
4-1 MENU DISPLAY MODES
● 00E OPTIMUM REC CURRENT function (record-
ing current automatic adjustment function)
To automatically adjust the recording current, select
this menu function and press the [HOLD] and [REC]
buttons simultaneously.
Also available on the top menu display are the following convenient functions for menu switch setting.
● Storing and calling up the current menu switch setting
● Restoring the menu switches to the factory setting
● Calling up the Direct Access group of menu switches which are clustered by function (Direct Access facility)
● Erasing all registered contents on the User Page (User Page facility)
● Menu lock function
For details, refer to “Recording current adjustment”
on page 38.
● 00F FIXED TIME ENTRY
4-1 MENU DISPLAY MODES
Sets the fixed time cue up point. To call up the
setting mode, select this menu and press the
[HOLD] button. For details, refer to “Fixed time cue
up function” on page 91.
[Counter display]
Usual display
The menu display consists of four types of display
modes.
Usual display
● Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu screen.
The menu switch Nos. are shown on the counter
display. The selected menu switch No. blinks on the
on-screen display.
● Turn the jog dial to call up all four modes one after
another.
MENU switch setting display
H
M
S
F
To access multiple menu switch items
The menu switches are organized in six function-
ally related groups.
• SERVO numbered 000
• VIDEO numbered 100
• AUDIO numbered 200
• SYSTEM numbered 300
• TIME CODE numbered 400
• ON-SCREEN numbered 500
• TBC/FRAME MEMORY numbered 600
CTL 1:23:45:20
● Press the [MENU] button to restore the usual
display.
[MENU] button
MENU
1
Top menu display
Top menu display
To select desired menu functions.
● D95: 525/625
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
Set the video signal system to NTSC or PAL.
525: NTSC signals
625: PAL signals
For details, refer to “4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM
SELECTION” on page 30.
● 00A: MENU SETTING
H
M
S
F
Jog dial
MENU
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
Hour meter display
Shows the drum running hours.
SET+HOLD>OFF
Jog dial
User page display
Shows the menu switch data registered on the
user page.
• INITIAL(0)
: Set the MENU switches to
the factory settings.
Menu switch setting display
• USER-1 LOAD (1) : Set the MENU switches to
002:OPERATION LOCK
OFF
003:SYNC SELECT
AUTO
USER-2 LOAD (3)
USER-3 LOAD (5)
the stored settings in the
user memory area.
H
M
S
F
005:AUTO TRACKING
• USER-1 SAVE (2) : To store the current menu
USER-2 SAVE (4) switch setting in the user
USER-3 SAVE (6) memory area.
For details, refer to “4-4 Saving and Calling Up
Menu Switch Settings” on page 32.
ON
008:CAP LOCK(525)
SW SEL
MENU
Jog dial
009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.
ACCELERATION
● 00B DIRECT ACCESS (Direct Access facility)
With this switch set to ON (1), one-touch direct
access to a functionally-related group of MENU
switches such as SERVO and VIDEO or to the hour
meter data or the Menu switches on user page is
available simply by pressing the specified button on
the control panel.
Jog dial
Hour meter data display
DH:DRUM HOUR METER
0600H
H
M
S
F
MENU
For details, refer to “4-5 Calling Up Functional
Menu Switch (Direct Access Functions)” on
page 33.
● 00C USER PAGE (user page facility)
Erases all registered menu switch settings. To do
this, select this menu function and press the SET
and [HOLD] buttons simultaneously.
Jog dial
User page display
U01 :(FOR USER)
U02 :(FOR USER)
U03 :(FOR USER)
U04 :(FOR USER)
U05 :(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
● 00D MENU LOCK function (menu lock facility)
Locks or unlocks menu switch settings.
OFF (0) : Settings can be changed.
MENU
ON (1) : Locking function is activated and menu
switch settings (except for the top menu)
cannot be changed.
28
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION
4-3 MENU SWITCH SETTING
This unit can be used with either the NTSC or PAL signal systems. The currently selected video signal system is
indicated by the 525/625 indicator on the counter display. To change the video signal system, follow the steps
below.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Video signal system indicator
Variable Motion
: NTSC
: PAL
525
625
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
SET
HOLD
MENU
REC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
CH3
REC
CH1
CH2
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
ON
I
AUDIO
AES/EBU
L
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
LINE
CPN
MONITOR
Jog dial
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
Variable Motion
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
[SEARCH] button
Jog dial
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
525
625
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9 AP
TE
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
AUTO OFF P.READ V.V
AR
PB/EE
R
E
M
O
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
[MENU] button
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
[HOLD] button
[SET] button
REC
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
[Counter display]
Operation procedure
[On-screen display]
Top menu display
[MENU] button
[HOLD] button
[SET] button
1. Call up the menu switch setting display.
Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu
screen on the counter display and on-screen
display. When the top menu is displayed, turn the
jog dial to show the menu switch setting screen.
● On-screen display data are output through the
rear panel [LINE2-SUPER] connector.
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
H
M
S
F
Operation procedure
[Counter display]
[On-screen display]
1. Press the [MENU] button to display the top
menu.
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
SET+HOLD>OFF
The counter display shows menu switch number.
2. Turn the jog dial to select “D95: 525/625”.
“D95” is shown on the counter display and “D95”
blinks on screen.
Menu switch setting
display
H
M
S
F
2. Select a menu switch item to set by turning the
jog dial.
● The selected menu switch number blinks on the
on-screen display.
● The menu switch number changes on the
counter display.
00C:USER PAGE
Menu switch No. Set value No.
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
002:OPERATION LOCK
OFF
003:SYNC SELECT
AUTO
005:AUTO TRACKING
ON
008:CAP LOCK(525)
SW SEL
SET+HOLD>OFF
3. Hold the [SEARCH] button down and turn the
jog dial to select the set value.
Select “525” for NTSC or “625” for PAL.
H
M
S
F
D95:525/625
4. To change the menu switch setting, hold the
[SET] button down and press the [HOLD]
button.
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.
ACCELERATION
3. Select the setting value of the menu switch by
turning the jog dial while pressing the
[SEARCH] button.
H
M
S
F
[ The Normal Display mode is restored.
00C:USER PAGE
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other items.
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
5. To apply the selected video signal system, turn
this unit OFF then ON again.
[ When the power is turned ON, the video signal
system is changed and the corresponding
video signal system indicator is shown on the
counter display (525 or 625 indicator).
SET+HOLD>OFF
300:DIRECT EJECT
4. Press the [SET] button to enter the finalized
settings in memory.
● During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter
display and “MENU SET” blinks on the on-
screen display. When setting is complete, the
normal screen is restored.
ON
301:DIRECT SEARCH
ON
302:BACK SPACE
ON
H
M
S
F
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
• When a cassette tape recorded on a signal system other than that set for this unit is played back, the
corresponding indicator ([525] or [625]) blinks.
When the NTSC system is selected and a PAL tape is played back, the [625] indicator blinks.
When the PAL system is selected and an NTSC tape is played back, the [525] indicator blinks.
• If required, select the audio reference level (-20 dB/-18 dB) for recording with menu switch No. 257 <AUD.
REF. SIGNAL LEV. >. (See page 54.)
300:DIRECT EJECT
OFF
301:DIRECT SEARCH
H
M
S
F
ON
302:BACK SPACE
ON
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
30
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4-4 SAVING AND CALLING UP MENU SWITCH SETTINGS
4-5 CALLING UP FUNCTIONAL MENU SWITCH (Direct Access Function)
The Direct Access facility groups menu switches into major functionally related groups such as SERVO and
VIDEO for easier access. These groups can be called up directly on the menu display. Hour meter data and User
Page menu switches can also be accessed this way.
The set menu switch data can be saved and called up with the 00A MENU SETTING item on the top menu
display.
If you’re going to use the current menu switch setting again later, you can store it in the user memory area. Then,
if the setting is changed, you can restore it simply by calling the stored user data.
It is also possible to restore the initial factory settings.The menu switch setting can be saved in USER-1 SAVE,
USER-2 SAVE or USER-3 SAVE .
The Direct Access function can be turned on or off with 00B DIRECT ACCESS on the top menu display.
Procedure
Counter display
Operation procedure
Enabling the Direct Access function
Setting
00B
1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial
to call up the top menu on the on-screen
display and the counter display.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial
to call up the top menu on the on-screen
display and the counter display.
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
H
M
S
F
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
On-screen display
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
D95:525/624
2. Turn the jog dial and select “00B DIRECT
ACCESS”.
● Turn the jog dial so that “00B” appears on the
counter display and “00B” blinks on the on-
screen display.
PLAYER RECORDER
2. Select 00A: MENU SETTING.
● Turn the jog dial so that 00A appears on the
counter display and 00A blinks on the on-screen
display.
SEARCH
VAR
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
P.PLAY
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
3. Select the saving or calling-up function and
execute it.
3. Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while
pressing the [SEARCH] button.
4. Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the
[SET] button.
SET+HOLD>OFF
[MENU] button
[SET] button
[HOLD] button
Front panel operation buttons
EJECT
When restoring the initial factory settings
Jog dial
REC
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
● Select “INITIAL (0)” by turning the jog dial while
The Direct Access function is set to ON.
[ The Normal Display mode is restored.
pressing the [SEARCH] button.
TOP
VIDEO
AUDIO
FF
+
● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the
[SET] button.
[ Factory settings are restored.
[ The Normal Display mode is restored.
* The fixed time data is not changed.
STAND BY
REW
STOP
PREROLL
To disable Direct Access, select “OFF (0)” by
turning the jog dial while pressing the
[SEARCH] button, then press the [HOLD]
button while pressing the [SET] button.
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
[Counter display]
[On-screen display]
Top menu display
Access item
Control
Information on display
TOP menu
Using the Direct Access function.
To call up the saved menu setting
Set value
Item No.
button
EJECT
PLAY
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
● Make sure the Direct Access function is set to
“ON”.
1. Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu
setting display.
(Recalling data stored in USER-1 SAVE )
● Select “USER-1 LOAD” by turning the jog dial
while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
TOP menu SW
VIDEO menu SW
Menu SW numbered
100 and 600
H
M
S
F
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
+
● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the
[SET] button.
[ The saved menu switch setting in “USER-1
SAVE” comes up.
[ The Normal Display mode is restored.
The data stored in USER-2 SAVE or USER-3
SAVE can be recalled using USER LOAD-2 or
USER-3 LOAD , respectively.
2. Press the corresponding front panel control
button, depending on the item. (Refer to the
table on the left.)
[ The starting item is shown on the counter
display and the first data appears on the on-
screen display, depending on what has been
selected.
AUDIO menu SW
PAUSE/
STILL
Menu SW numbered
200
SET+HOLD>OFF
SERVO/SYSTEM
menu SW
STANDBY Menu SW numbered
000 and 300
Menu switch setting display
300: DIRECT EJECT
TC menu SW
REW
Menu SW numbered
400
ON
301:DIRECT SEARCH
Memory
ON
Move the items by turning the jog dial.
302:BACK SPACE
ON
ON-SCREEN menu STOP
SW
Menu SW numbered
500
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
Page down function
SAVE
When menu switches for a function are shown on
more than one screen, you can display the menu
screen by group with the Direct Access function.
Then, each time the operation button correspond-
ing to the same Direct Access function is pressed,
the menu screens in the group can be advanced
one screen at a time (page down function).
(e.g.) When the [PLAY] button is pressed with the
Direct Access function set to “ON”, the top screen
of menu switch #100 is shown. When the [PLAY]
button is pressed again, the next menu screen is
shown.
To save the current menu switch setting
Hour meter
FF
Drum running hours
LOAD
User menu SW
PREROLL Menu switch on the
user page
(Storing data in USER-1 SAVE )
● Select “USER-1 SAVE” by turning the jog dial
while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
Change
Call up
300: DIRECT EJECT
300: DIRECT EJECT
301:DIRECT SEARCH
302:BACK SPACE
OFF
301:DIRECT SEARCH
ON
302:BACK SPACE
ON
ON
ON
ON
+
● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the
[SET] button.
[ The current menu setting is stored in the user
memory area. The data already saved is
updated.
The labels under the front panel control buttons
indicate the functions that can be called up with
the Direct Access facility.
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
• If the group consists of one screen, the page
down function cannot be used.
[ The Normal Display mode is restored.
32
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function)
4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function) (con't)
Up to five menu switch settings can be registered on the user page (User Page function).
The User Page function allows you to register frequently used menu switches for quicker access when you want
to change the settings.
Procedure
Counter display
On-screen display
301:DIRECT SEARCH
Changing the registered menu switch setting
Procedure
ON
005:AUTO TRACKING
002:OPERATION LOCK
U04:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
1. Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu
display mode.
ON
Menu switch setting display
Registering a menu switch on the User Page
OFF
300: DIRECT EJECT
ON
301:DIRECT SEARCH
ON
302:BACK SPACE
ON
1. Call up the menu switch setting screen.
Press the [MENU] button.
[ Call up the menu screen on the counter display
and on-screen display. When the top menu is
displayed, turn the jog dial to set to the
menu switch setting screen.
2. Turn the jog dial to select the menu switch you
want to register.
Menu switch selection is also possible using the
2. Select the menu switch item to be changed
with the jog dial.
● The selected menu switch number blinks on the
on-screen display.
● The menu switch number changes on the
counter display.
U05:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
F
F
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
301:DIRECT SEARCH
005:AUTO TRACKING
002:OPERATION LOCK
U04:(FOR USER)
ON
OFF
OFF
H
M
S
F
3. Select the setting value by turning the jog dial
while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
● The counter display shows the setting value.
300: DIRECT EJECT
ON
301:DIRECT SEARCH
“Direct Access function”.
U05:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
ON
3. Press and hold the [SET] button.
During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter display
and “MENU SET” blinks on the on-screen display.
302:BACK SPACE
4. To change additional items, repeat steps 2 to 3.
ON
307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
5. Press the [SET] button to register the new
setting.
[ During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter
display and “MENU SET” blinks on the on-
screen display. When setting is complete, the
normal screen is restored.
5MIN
311:AUTO PLAY
OFF
While still keeping the [SET] button pressed (even after
the [SET] indication goes out), execute the next
operation.
H
M
S
F
Hold the [SET] button.
MENU SET
4. When the menu switch setting screen appears, turn
the jog dial to access the User Page screen.
*Memo: The User Page screen can be displayed
using the Direct Access function. See
page 33.
H
M
S
MENU SET
5. Select the line you want to register on the User
Page screen.
While keeping the [SET] button pressed, turn the
jog dial to select the line number (U01 - U05) you
want to register.
User Page display screen
U01:(FOR USER)
U02:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
[ The line number is displayed on the counter
display; the line number blinks on the on-
screen display.
U03:(FOR USER)
U04:(FOR USER)
U05:(FOR USER)
6. Release the [SET] button.
[ The menu switch setting is displayed and the
selected line is registered on the User Page.
7. To register more items, repeat steps 2 through 6.
Registration of up to five items is possible.
8. To end User Page registration, press the
[MENU] button. The normal display will be
restored.
Release the [SET] button.
301:DIRECT SEARCH
ON
U02:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
U03:(FOR USER)
U04:(FOR USER)
U05:(FOR USER)
• When steps 2 through 6 are performed on an already
registered line, the new menu switch setting replaces
the original line.
• Registered lines on the User Page can be moved.
Select the menu switch you want to move and follow
steps 3 through 6.
• Items D95,00A to 00E on the top menu and the
DH:DRUM HOUR menu switch cannot be registered
on the User Page.
• The menu registered on the User Page is reset when
the unit is initialized (with menu switch 00A).
34
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4-7 HOW TO LOCK THE MENU SWITCH SETTINGS (Menu switch lock function)
4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function) (con't)
To prevent accidental erasure of menu switch settings, you can lock the menu switch settings. This function is
not the same as operation lock.
Procedure
Top menu screen
Erasing all registered items on the User Page
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
Procedure
Top menu display.
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
SET+HOLD>OFF
Top menu display
1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial
to call up the top menu.
[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-
H
M
S
F
D95:525/625
Activating the menu switch lock function
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
H
M
S
F
1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial
to call up the top menu.
[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-
screen display and counter display.
2. Select “00C USER PAGE” on the top menu.
“00C” is shown on the counter display and “00C”
blinks on the on-screen display.
screen display and counter display.
Check the User Page display.
U01:(FOR USER)
SET+HOLD>OFF
2. Select “00D: MENU LOCK” on the top menu
with the jog dial.
“00D” is shown on the counter display and “00D”
3. While keeping the [SET] button pressed, press
the [HOLD] button.
[ All registered items on the User Page are
erased and the display returns to the normal
display mode.
U02:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
U03:(FOR USER)
D95:525/625
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
blinks on the on-screen display.
U04:(FOR USER)
H
M
S
F
3. Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while
pressing the [SEARCH] button.
U05:(FOR USER)
4. While keeping the [SET] button pressed, press
the [HOLD] button.
[ The menu switch lock function is set to “ON”
SET+HOLD>ON
User Page display
301:DIRECT SEARCH
Erasing registered items one at a time
ON
002:OPERATION LOCK
OFF
214:PB V.FADE
5M
340:SEARCH SPEED
X32
U05:(FOR USER)
and the normal display is restored.
H
M
S
F
1. Press the [MENU] button to select the Menu
Switch Display mode.
Normal display
To disable the menu switch lock function, select
“OFF (0)” by turning the jog dial while pressing
the [SEARCH] button. Then, while keeping the
[SET] button pressed, press the [HOLD] button.
2. Turn the jog dial to access the User Page
display and select the menu switch item to be
erased.
H
M
S
F
* The selected menu switch number blinks on the on-
screen display.
* The menu switch number is changed on the counter
display.
Hold the [SET] button down.
When the menu switch lock function is
activated, only the top menu settings can be
changed. All other settings are locked.
CTL 1:23:45:20
H
M
S
F
MENU SET
3. Hold the [SET] button pressed.
[ During setting, “SET” is shown on the counter
display and on-screen display.
Turn the jog dial.
While still keeping the [SET] button pressed
(even after the “SET” indication goes out),
perform the next operation.
Menu switch display
601: V.BLANK MASK
OFF
H
M
S
F
4. Turn the jog dial to move to the other menu
switch screen page. Release the [SET] button.
[ The registered item on the User Page is
erased.
5. To erase more items, repeat steps 2 through 4.
Release the [SET] button.
6. Press the [MENU] button to finish.
[ The normal display mode is restored.
Check the User Page display.
U01:(FOR USER)
002:OPERATION LOCK
OFF
H
M
S
F
214:PB V.FADE
5M
340:SEARCH SPEED
X32
U05:(FOR USER)
36
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4 MENU SWITCH SETTING
4-8 RECORDING CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
4-9 HOUR METER DATA DISPLAY
Drum running hours can be displayed on the counter
display and the on-screen display. Use this informa-
tion as a guide to choosing the appropriate mainte-
nance interval.
Thanks to this function, it is not necessary to adjust the recording current each time the tape is changed.
When a tape with a different optimum recording current is used, this function allows you to take advantage of this
tape’s performance.
If automatic adjustment is performed on a tape which has been used many times, its optimum recording current
may be quite different from that of a new tape. In this case, perform automatic adjustment using the new tape.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
Procedure
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Procedure
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
1. Press the [MENU] button.
[ The Menu Display mode is engaged.
Activating the recording current adjustment
function
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
[MENU] button
[HOLD] button
2. Select the DH display by turning the jog dial.
[ Hour meter data (drum running hours) is
displayed on the counter display and the on-
screen display (0000H - 9999 H).
1. Light all [VIDEO INPUT] indicators with the
input video signal switch.
[FF] button
2. Select the PB/EE Auto Switching mode with
the [PB PB/EE] button.
3. Load a recording tape and engage the Stop
mode.
3. To return to the normal display mode, press
the [MENU] button.
4. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial
to call up the top menu.
[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-
D95:525/625
When the Direct Access function is set to ON,
press the [FF] button to accelerate item
indication.
SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525
00A:MENU SETTING
SET+HOLD INITIAL
00B:DIRECT ACCESS
SET+HOLD>ON
00C:USER PAGE
SET+HOLD>INITIAL
00D:MENU LOCK
H
M
S
F
Direct Access
function
screen display and counter display.
ON
5. Select “00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT” on the
00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT
number
HOLD+REC>START
top menu with the jog dial.
00F:FIXED TIME ENTRY
SET+HOLD>OFF
00:00:00:00
H
M
S
F
• “00E” is shown on the counter display and “00E”
blinks on the on-screen display.
[FF] button
6. While keeping the [REC] button pressed, press
the [HOLD] button.
[ Automatic recording current adjustment will
DH:DURM HOUR METER
0600
start.
H
M
S
F
It takes several minutes to complete the
automatic adjustment.
• To interrupt the adjustment, press the [MENU]
button twice.
Drum running hours
OPTIMUM REC CURRENT
! ! PERFORM ! ! 10 05
• When adjustment is finished, the indication
shown on the left is displayed on the on-screen
display.
(ABORT > MENU KEY)
7. When the indication on the left figure is shown
on the on-screen display, press the [MENU]
button twice.
OPTIMUM REC CURRENT
! ! END ! ! 10 05
[ The previous display mode is restored.
(PUSH MENU KEY)
• When the adjustment cannot be completed, the
indication shown on the left is displayed on the
on-screen display.
In this case, change the recording position or
replace the recording tape.
OPTIMUM REC CURRENT
! ! ERROR ! !
(PUSH MENU KEY)
38
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST
5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST
Gives the names and brief description of the menu switches. See reference pages for details
Functions enclosed in
are not available on the PAL system.
Functional
group
No
Names
Description
Reference
Page
Functional
group
No
Names Description
Reference
Page
SERVO
VIDEO
002
003
005
008
OPERATION LOCK
SYNC SELECT
AUTO TRACKING
CAP LOCK (525)
Operation mode lock ON/OFF.......................................................................... 43
Selects the reference sync signal (EXT or AUTO) for the servo system......... 43
Selects automatic or manual tracking .............................................................. 43
Selects the color frame servo sync system ...................................................... 43
Selects the color frame servo sync system ...................................................... 44
Selects the color frame servo lock direction ..................................................... 44
AUDIO
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
236
AUDIO IN LEVEL CH3
AUDIO IN LEVEL CH4
AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH1
AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH2
AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH3
AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH4
AUDIO MON LEVEL LCH
AUDIO MON LEVEL RCH
PRO 48K S.R.CONV.
Sets the audio input reference level for CH3.................................................... 52
Sets the audio input reference level for CH4.................................................... 52
Sets the audio output reference level for CH1 ................................................. 52
Sets the audio output reference level for CH2 ................................................. 52
Sets the audio output reference level for CH3 ................................................. 52
Sets the audio output reference level for CH4 ................................................. 52
Sets the output reference level for the LCH audio monitor .............................. 52
Sets the output reference level for the RCH audio monitor .............................. 52
Enables the sampling rate converter even when the input signal is
008p CAP LOCK (625)
009
CAP RELOCKING DIR
104
111
112
119
120
124
128
130
133
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
CPN LEVEL/SETUP (525)
VD REC SIGNAL SEL.
ECC MODE
SLOW PICTURE
NO CTL MUTING
CHROMA ROTE
PB EXTENSION LINE
BLANKING WIDTH
Selects Betacam or MII component level ......................................................... 44
Selects the video signal created by internal generator..................................... 44
Selects level of error correction ........................................................................ 45
Selects FIELD or FRAME slow motion playback mode. .................................. 45
Selects if the video output mutes when playing back a blank tape .................. 45
Selects the output chroma phase reference signal .......................................... 45
Selects the extension line output during playback ........................................... 45
Selects the H blanking width ............................................................................ 46
Adds setup to composite signals ...................................................................... 46
Selects the video signal that will be recorded on the extra line ........................ 47
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 1 ..................... 47
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 2. .................... 47
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 3 ..................... 47
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 4 ..................... 47
Selects how extra line information is added during playback ........................... 47
Selects which line to add extra line 1 information ............................................ 48
Selects which line to add extra line 2 information ............................................ 48
Selects which line to add extra line 3 information ............................................ 48
Selects which line to add extra line 4 information ............................................ 48
Selects the video signal that will be recorded on the extra line. ....................... 48
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 1 ..................... 48
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 2. .................... 48
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 3 ..................... 48
Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 4 ..................... 48
Selects how extra line information is added during playback ........................... 49
Selects which line to add extra line 1 information ............................................ 49
Selects which line to add extra line 2 information ............................................ 49
Selects which line to add extra line 3 information ............................................ 49
Selects which line to add extra line 4 information ............................................ 49
Turns Y/C separation ON/OFF for composite signals in the
a professional 48K AES/EBU signal................................................................ 52
Disables the embedded audio signal from the SDI output signal ..................... 53
Turns the embedded audio noise ON/OFF when the sync signal is input
237
247
EMBEDDED AUDIO
DIG AUD AT SYNC IN
from a different system .................................................................................... 53
Selects the input source for the CH3 and CH4 audio signals .......................... 53
Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH1 audio signal .................................. 54
Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH2 audio signal .................................. 54
Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH3 audio signal .................................. 54
Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH4 audio signal .................................. 54
Selects the audio recording reference level ..................................................... 54
Selects the output audio track during search ................................................... 54
251
253
254
255
256
257
261
CH3/4 SOURCE SEL.
CH1 REC SIGNAL SEL
CH2 REC SIGNAL SEL
CH3 REC SIGNAL SEL
CH4 REC SIGNAL SEL
AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV
AUD SEL. AT SEARCH
LINE SETUP (525)
EXTRA LINE REC (525)
EXTRA-L R1 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L R2 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L R3 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L R4 SEL (525)
EXTRA LINE PB (525)
EXTRA-L P1 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L P2 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L P3 SEL (525)
EXTRA-L P4 SEL (525)
SYSTEM
300
301
302
307
311
312
314
317
319
320
323
328
340
351
352
357
359
363
DIRECT EJECT
DIRECT SEARCH
BACK SPACE
PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME
AUTO PLAY
AUTO REW
Enables /disables direct EJECT (accepts EJECT command from any mode) ..... 54
Direct search ON/OFF...................................................................................... 54
Back space edit operation ON/OFF ................................................................. 54
Selects duration of long-time pause/still/standby ON ....................................... 55
Auto play operation ON/OFF ............................................................................ 55
Auto rewind operation ON/OFF ........................................................................ 55
Selects the modes in which the VCR automatically switches from PB to EE... 55
Selects the device type ID returned to a 9-pin remote control ........................ 55
Selects the maximum tape speed in FF/REW modes ...................................... 55
Sets the PREROLL time................................................................................... 56
Selects the mode engaged after preroll operation ........................................... 56
Selects whether the edit point data is cleared after performing the edit........... 56
Selects the maximum search speed when using the search dial ..................... 56
Selects the video/audio preread function ......................................................... 56
Selects the output audio phase correction during audio preread ..................... 56
Enables/ disables automatic diagnosis operation at power ON ....................... 57
Selects the "feel" of an external editing /remote controller's JOG dial ............. 57
Changes the personality of the VCR to match the type of editing
controller connected ........................................................................................ 57
Enables/disables channel condition monitoring during editing ......................... 57
Selects video output source (freeze or tape) during servo lock ....................... 57
Enables simultaneous control of multiple VCR's from a single remote ............ 58
Switches ON a safety function to prevent accidental change of input router ... 58
Selects whether or not simultaneous operation of the player and
recorder is permitted ....................................................................................... 58
Switches the match frame mode ON/OFF during swap editing ....................... 58
Selects the method for opening the menu switch setting mode ....................... 58
Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-1) Insert mode ............. 59
Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-2) Insert mode ............. 59
Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-3) Insert mode ............. 59
Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-4) Insert mode ............. 59
138p EXTRA LINE REC (625)
139p EXTRA-L R1 SEL (625)
140p EXTRA-L R2 SEL (625)
141p EXTRA-L R3 SEL (625)
142p EXTRA-L R4 SEL (625)
143p EXTRA LINE PB (625)
144p EXTRA-L P1 SEL (625)
145p EXTRA-L P2 SEL (625)
146p EXTRA-L P3 SEL (625)
147p EXTRA-L P4 SEL (625)
PB/EE MODE
9PIN DEVICE ID
FF/REW MAX SPEED
PREROLL TIME
PREROLL END MODE
EDIT POINT CLEAR
SEARCH SPEED
PREREAD
AUD PREREAD TIMING
DIAG AT POWER ON
JOG FEELING (REMOTE)
CONTROLLER SELECT
148
IN VBLANK YCOMB (525)
V. Blanking period ........................................................................................... 49
Turns Y/C separation ON/OFF for composite signals in the
V. Blanking period ........................................................................................... 49
Selects the timing for output video signals during editing ................................ 50
148p IN VBLANK YCOMB (625)
149
VIDEO OUT SELECT
PB V. FADE
367
368
369
371
372
EDIT INTERRUPTION
STARTING PIC FREEZE
PARA-RUN
INPUT SELECT SAFETY
P+R AT SWAP MODE
AUDIO
214
215
216
219
221
222
223
224
225
Enables V fades during playback at the audio edit transitions ......................... 50
AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1 Selects audio REC level adjustment as individual channels or stereo pairs .... 50
AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1
SEARCH REC CH
SEARCH PB AT 1+3/2+4
MONITOR MIX MODE
CH3/4 OUT SEL AT 2CH
AUDIO IN LEVEL CH1
AUDIO IN LEVEL CH2
Selects audio PB level adjustment as individual channels or stereo pairs ....... 51
Selects the signal source for recording linear audio tracks .............................. 51
Switches the linear track audio ON/OFF during search ................................... 51
Selects the audio monitor mixing level ............................................................. 51
Selects the signal output from the CH3/CH4 audio channels .......................... 52
Sets the audio input reference level for CH1.................................................... 52
Sets the audio input reference level for CH2.................................................... 52
373
374
375
376
377
378
MATCH FRAME
MENU OPEN SAFETY
AUD EDIT PRESET CH1
AUD EDIT PRESET CH2
AUD EDIT PRESET CH3
AUD EDIT PRESET CH4
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
When the contents of a menu item differ for NTSC and PAL, this is indicated after the menu item name by (525)
for NTSC and (625) for PAL. With PAL, “p” is shown after the menu No.
<SERVO> [ ] : Factory setting
Functions enclosed in
are not available on the PAL SYSTEM.
Functional
group
No
Names
Description
Reference
Page
Item
Setting
Content
Menu SW
No.
On-screen
display
Counter
display
On-screen
display
SYSTEM
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
JOG FEELENG (LOCAL)
Selects jog dial operation response level ......................................................... 59
Sets the first digit of the ID code ...................................................................... 59
Sets the second digit of the ID code................................................................. 59
Sets the third digit of the ID code ..................................................................... 59
Sets the fourth digit of the ID code ................................................................... 59
ON/OFF of the EE signal output when no tape is loaded................................. 59
Selects the number of fields for which the color frame flag is set for
9 PIN ID
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
---(1ST)
--(2ND)
-(3RD)
(4TH)
9 PIN ID-
9 PIN ID--
9 PIN ID---
002
OPERATION
LOCK
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Switches the operation mode lock ON/OFF.
Set to ON to lock the VCR in the current mode.
When “OPERATION LOCK” is ON, you cannot
operate the control buttons, switches, knobs and
dials on the VCR or change any menu switch
settings other than this menu switch itself. Only the
[POWER] switch and the [PHONES LEVEL] adjust
knob remain operable.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
MUTING AT NO TAPE
CF FLAG REPLY (525)
9-pin remote control ........................................................................................ 60
Selects the number of fields for which the color frame flag is
387p CF FLAG REPLY (625)
set for 9-pin remote control ............................................................................. 60
Switches Multi Cue mode ON/OFF .................................................................. 60
Selects the player VTR type during swap editing ............................................. 60
Enables/disables the bump mode during swap editing .................................... 60
Selects the editing accuracy during swap editing............................................. 60
Selects whether the BR-D92 automatically switches to EE for single monitor
operation during swap editing ......................................................................... 60
389
390
391
393
395
MULTI CUE MODE
SWAP VTR SELECT
SYNCHRONIZATION
SYNC GRADE
003
SYNC SELECT
1
[3]
EXT
[AUTO]
Selects the reference sync signal used by the
servo system.
EXT :Synchronizes with the signal applied to
the[REF] input connector regardless of
VCR mode (playback or record).
AUTO :Synchronizes with the signal applied to
the [REF] input connector during
AUTO-EE
TIME CODE
400
VITC LINE-1 SEL (525)
Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-1........................................... 61
Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-1........................................... 61
Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-2........................................... 61
Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-2........................................... 61
Sets the CTL counter to operate in NONDROP/DROP frame mode ............... 61
Selects what elements of time the code (TC, UB) are regenerated ................. 61
Selects external source (LTC/ VITC) for regeneration ..................................... 62
Selects the edit mode in which time code is regenerated. ............................... 62
Turns the color frame flag ON/OFF for the time code bit ................................. 62
Selects whether incoming VITC is recorded onto the Sub-Time Code ............ 62
Selects the VITC time code output source (Main/Sub) time code ................... 62
Selects whether LTC time code is output in the Search mode......................... 62
Selects if the user bit data stored in the memory is recorded preferentially ..... 63
400p VITC LINE-1 SEL (625)
401 VITC LINE-2 SEL (525)
401p VITC LINE-2 SEL (625)
playback.The VCR locks to the video
input during recording. (If no signal is
present on the [REF] connector and video
input connector, the VCR synchronizes to
an internal clock signal regardless of this
menu's setting).
402
403
409
410
421
450
451
452
457
CTL DF SELECT (525)
REGEN MODE
EXT REGEN TC
AUTO REGEN MODE
TCG CF FLAG
SUB TC (VITC) REC
VITC OUT SELECT
SEARCH LTC
Selects manual or automatic tracking adjustment in
the Play mode.
005
AUTO TRACKING
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
ON :The tracking value is automatically adjusted
to the optimum position when the Play mode
is engaged. The [TRACKING] knob is not
operable. When the Automatic Tracking mode
is engaged, tracking adjustment takes several
seconds. During this time, audio output
signals are derived from the linear tracks.
OFF: Tracking can be adjusted manually with the
[TRACKING] knob. When the meter
indication is set to “Tracking”, the
UB PRESET AUTO
ON-SCREEN
501
502
504
505
512
513
CHARA H POSITION
CHARA V POSITION
INFORMATION SELECT
REMAIN ENABLE
Sets the horizontal display position of the on-screen data ............................... 63
Sets on-screen data vertical display position ................................................... 63
Selects the type of information shown by the on-screen display...................... 63
Enables/ disables the tape “Remaining Time” display indication ..................... 63
MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE Selects whether “MUTING” or “CONDITION ALARM” appears on-screen ...... 64
EDIT ON SCREEN
ON/OFF of edit on-screen display ................................................................... 64
TBC.FRAME
MEMORY
601
620
V.BLANK MASK
DUBBING LOOP
Turns the V sync section masking ON/OFF during playback ........................... 64
Enables/ disables the Dubbing Loop (multi-gen test) function ......................... 64
[TRACKING] button blinks.
008
CAP LOCK (525)
[0]
1
2
[SW SEL]
2 FIELD
4 FIELD
Selects the color frame servo sync system for
NTSC signals.
SW SEL : The color frame servo setting is
determined by the sub panel’s [CF]
switch setting.
2 FIELD : The frame servo is set. Color framing is
not executed.
4 FIELD : 4 field color frame servo is executed.
42
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Setting
Item
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
008p
CAP LOCK (625)
[0]
1
2
[SW SEL]
2 FIELD
4 FIELD
8 FIELD
Selects the color frame servo sync system for PAL
signals.
SW SEL : The color frame servo setting is
determined by the sub panel’s [CF]
switch setting.
2 FIELD : The frame servo is set. Color framing is
not executed.
4 FIELD : 4 field color frame servo is executed.
8 FIELD : 8 field color frame servo is executed.
112
ECC MODE
[0]
1
2
[NORMAL]
NO CANCEL
NO
This menu activates or deactivates the error
correction circuit (error correction /error conceal).
NORMAL
: Activates all error correction
circuitry.
3
CORRECTION
NO CONCEAL : NO error concealment is applied
NO CORRECTION: Neither the error concealment
nor the error correction circuits
function.
For details, refer to page 80.
Selects the “Field” or “Frame” slow play mode.
FRAME : Outputs a frame picture.
FIELD : Outputs a field picture.
119
120
SLOW PICTURE
NO CTL MUTING
0
[1]
FRAME
[FIELD]
009
CAP RE-LOCKING
DIR.
[0]
1
[ACCELERATION] Selects the color frame servo lock direction after
DECELERATION
executing the bump function.
If the edit point shifts due to the color frame servo,
select + or - to adjust the edit point.
ACCELERATION:Moves the edit point in the +
direction (locks in the
acceleration direction).
DECELERATION:Moves the edit point in the -
direction (locks in the
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Selects the video signal output when a non-
recorded section (NO CTL) of the tape is played
back.
OFF: Still picture is output.
ON : Black picture is output.
deceleration direction).
Switches the output chroma phase reference for
component signals or composite signals.
CPS : Varies the phase so that the chroma level is
not changed with the composite vector scope.
CPN: Varies the phase so that the chroma level is
not changed with the component vector
scope.
124
CHROMA ROTE
[0]
1
[CPS]
CPN
<VIDEO>
104
CPN LEV./SETUP
(525)
0
[1]
2
LOW/ON
This item should be applied to NTSC signals only.
Sets input/output levels for the [Y, R-Y, B-Y]
connectors on the rear panel.
Sets input/output levels and setup presence.
LOW/ON : Sets component signals to MII levels
with setup.
HIGH/ON : Sets component signals to Bcam levels
with setup.
LOW/OFF : Sets component signals to MII levels
without setup.
[HIGH/ON]
LOW/OFF
HIGH/OFF
3
Set this switch when adjusting the chroma phase
with the video control.
128
PB EXTENSION
LINE
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Sets whether or not the video signal extension line
is output during playback.
ON : Outputs the extension line.
When a tape recorded on this unit is played back,
all video signal lines are output.
OFF: Does not output the extension line.
Set to this position when playing back tapes not
recorded on this unit.
*During recording, the following signal lines are
recorded as the EXTENSION LINE.
[525]:LINE 20, 21, 22, 263, 282, 283, 284 and
525 (For LINE 282, the second half only)
[625]:LINE 19, 20, 21, 22, 331, 332, 333, 334 and
623
HIGH/OFF: Sets component signals to Bcam levels
without setup.
111
VD REC SIGNAL
SEL.
1
COLOR BAR Selects the video signal output by the internal
signal generator. The selected signal is output in
[2]
4
5
[BLACK]
MULTI BURST conform to the SMPTE standard.
PULSE & BAR
COLOR BAR :Color bar is selected. (These are
the EE and Record modes.These signals do not
75% color bar signals).
:Black signal is selected.
MULTI BURST :Multi Burst signal is selected.
PULSE & BAR :Pulse & Bar signal is selected.
BLACK
This menu functions only with tapes recorded on
this unit.
When a tape recorded on this unit is played back
on the BR-D80, BR-D750, BR-D92 or BR-D860,
the EXTENSION LINE is not played back.
For details, refer to page 89.
44
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
Selects the video signal H blanking width.
Sets the input video signal line whose data will be
recorded on the extra line. Selects the fixed line or
user-set line.
130
BLANKING WIDTH
[0]
1
[WIDE]
NARROW
138
EXTRA LINE REC
(525)
[0]
1
2
[FIX]
USER (COLOR)
USER (MONO)
WIDE
: H blanking width is set to the blanking
width used by analog video signals.
NARROW : H blanking width is set to the blanking
width used by digital video signals.
Use this position for digital video signal
dubbing.
FIX: Records the information from line 22 onto
extra line-1 and the information from line 284
onto extra line-2 in the Color mode.
USER (COLOR):Records the information from 2
specified lines onto extra line-1
and line-2 in the Color mode.
Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139 and
No. 140.
133
LINE SETUP
(525)
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Selects whether or not setup should be added to
composite signals (NTSC only).
OFF: Setup is not added.
USER (MONO) :Records the information from 4
specified lines onto extra lines 1
ON : Adds setup.
to 4 in the Black and White mode.
Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139 to
No. 142.
* When a recording is made with this menu switch
set to “USER (MONO)”, extra line data cannot be
played back normally on the BR-D50/D51/D52/
D80/D92/D350/D750/D860.
139
140
141
142
EXTRA-L R1 SEL
(525)
01
11
Sets video signal lines that will be recorded on
extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4.
11
12
18
21
22
273
It is possible to set each extra line independently.
•No. 139 <EXTRA-L R1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.
•No. 140 <EXTRA-L R2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.
•No. 141 <EXTRA-L R3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.
•No. 142 <EXTRA-L R4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.
Select 1 line from lines 11 to 22 and 273 to 284 for
each extra line.
* Extra lines 3 and 4 are effective only when menu
switch No. 138 <EXTRA LINE REC (525)> is set
to “USER (MONO)”.
EXTRA-L R2 SEL
(525)
EXTRA-L R3 SEL
(525)
28
29
283
284
[First setting]
No. 139 ... 22
No. 140 ... 284
No. 141 ... 21
No. 142 ... 283
EXTRA-L R4 SEL
(525)
Selects how extra line signal data is added to the
playback video signal during playback.
143
EXTRA LINE PB
(525)
[0]
1
[MUTING]
AUTO
2
USER SETTING MUTING
: Line data is not added to the
playback video signal.
: Extra line data is added to the
line selected for extra line
recording.
AUTO
USER SETTING: Extra line data is added to the
four lines specified by the user.
Lines can be selected with menu
switches No. 144 to No. 147.
46
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
Selects the playback video signal line to add signal
data recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4 for output.
Effective only when menu switch No. 143 <EXTRA
Selects how extra line signal data is added to the
playback video signal during playback.
MUTING :Line data is not added to the playback
video signal.
AUTO :Extra line data is added to the line
selected for extra line recording.
144
EXTRA-L P1 SEL
(525)
00
10
143p
EXTRA LINE PB
(625)
[0]
1
2
[MUTING]
AUTO
USER SETTING
11
12
18
21
22
273
LINE PB> is set to “USER SETTING”.
145
146
147
EXTRA-L P2 SEL
(525)
•No. 144 <EXTRA-L P1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.
•No. 145 <EXTRA-L P2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.
•No. 146 <EXTRA-L P3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.
•No. 147 <EXTRA-L P4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.
USER SETTING:Extra line data is added to the
four lines specified by the user.
EXTRA-L P3 SEL
(525)
28
29
283
284
Select 1 line from lines 10 to 22 and 273 to 284 for
each extra line.
* When the information such as time code data is
superimposed on the same line, extra line data is not
output.
Lines can be selected with menu
switches No. 144p to No. 147p.
[First setting]
No. 144 ... 22
No. 145 ... 284
No. 146 ... 21
No. 147 ... 283
EXTRA-L P4 SEL
(525)
144p
145p
146p
147p
EXTRA-L P1 SEL
(625)
00
6
Selects the playback video signal line to add signal
data recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4 for output.
Effective only when menu switch No. 143p
<EXTRA LINE PB> is set to “USER SETTING”.
• No. 144P <EXTRA-L P1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.
• No. 145P <EXTRA-L P2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.
• No. 146P <EXTRA-L P3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.
• No. 147P <EXTRA-L P4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.
Select 1 line from lines 6 to 22, 319 to 335 and 623
for each extra line.
15
16
18
21
22
319
138p
EXTRA LINE
REC (625)
[0]
1
2
[FIX]
Sets the input video signal line whose data will be
USER (COLOR) recorded on the extra line. Selects the fixed line or
EXTRA-L P2 SEL
(625)
USER (MONO)
user-set line.
FIX: Records the information from line 22 onto
extra line-1 and the information from line 623
onto extra line-2 in the Color mode.
USER (COLOR):Records the information from 2
specified lines onto extra line-1
and line-2 in the Color mode.
Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139p and
No. 140p.
EXTRA-L P3 SEL
(625)
33
34
35
334
335
623
[First setting]
No. 144 ... 22
No. 145 ... 623
No. 146 ... 21
No. 147 ... 334
EXTRA-L P4 SEL
(625)
* When the information such as time code data is
superimposed on the same line, extra line data is
not output.
USER (MONO) :Records the information from 4
specified lines onto extra lines 1
to 4 in the Black and White mode.
Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139p to
No. 142p.
* When a recording is made with this menu switch set to
“USER (MONO)”, extra line data cannot be played back
normally on the BR-D50/D51/D52/D350/D80/D92/
D750/D860.
Selects whether or not Y/C separation is applied to
composite signals in the V. Blanking period.
OFF:Y/C separation is not applied.
ON :Y/C separation is applied. Normally set to
this position.
OFF WITH21: Y/C separation is not applied to the
V. Blanking period and section of
line 21.
148
IN VBLANK
YCOMB (525)
0
[1]
2
OFF
[ON]
OFF WITH21
• To read composite signals containing teletext with
a teletext reader, set this switch to “OFF” or “OFF
WITH21”.
139p
140p
141p
142p
EXTRA-L R1 SEL
(625)
00
6
Sets video signal lines that will be recorded on
extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4.
15
16
18
21
22
319
It is possible to set each extra line independently.
• No. 139p <EXTRA-L R1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.
• No. 140p <EXTRA-L R2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.
• No. 141p <EXTRA-L R3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.
• No. 142p <EXTRA-L R4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.
Select 1 line from lines 6 to 22, 319 to 335 and 623
for each extra line.
EXTRA-L R2 SEL
(625)
148p
IN VBLANK
YCOMB (625)
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Selects whether or not the Y/C separation is
applied to composite signals in the V. Blanking
period.
OFF:Y/C separation is not applied.
ON :Y/C separation is applied. Normally set to
this position.
EXTRA-L R3 SEL
(625)
33
34
35
334
335
623
[First setting]
No. 139 ... 22
No. 140 ... 623
No. 141 ... 21
No. 142 ... 334
* Extra lines 3 and 4 are effective only when menu switch
No. 138p <EXTRA LINE REC (625)> is set to “USER
(MONO)”.
• To read composite signals containing teletext with
a teletext reader, set this switch to “OFF”.
EXTRA-L R4 SEL
(625)
48
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
Selects the video signal output timing during
editing.
149
VIDEO OUT
SELECT
[0]
1
[NORMAL]
SYNC DELAY
A ROLL
216
AUD PB VOLUME
MODE 1
[0]
1
[CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4]
MAS-1 BAL-2/
MAS-3 BAL-4
Selects the function of the [AUDIO PB LEVEL]
volume controls.
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4: Each of the 4 channels can
be adjusted independently with the
corresponding [AUDIO PB LEVEL] volume
control.
MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4: The [AUDIO PB
LEVEL] volume control for CH1 or CH3
operates as a master level control, enabling
the audio playback levels of CH1 and CH2 or
CH3 and CH4 to be adjusted simultaneously
as a stereo pair. The [AUDIO PB LEVEL]
volume control for CH2 or CH4 operates as a
balance control for its corresponding pair,
enabling audio playback balance to be
adjusted between CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and
CH4.
NORMAL
: Shifts the position of output video
signals by 4H during editing.
Normally, set to this position.
*When shifting by 4H, information in
the input signal’s blanking sections
may be input to the image area. In
such a case, use “SYNC DELAY”
or “A ROLL”.
2
SYNC DELAY : Shifts the sync signal position
during editing, without shifting the
output video signals.
A ROLL
: Shifts the output video signals by 1
frame during editing.
<AUDIO>
214
Selects whether or not the audio V. fade function is
used for smoother edited audio transitions during
playback.
OFF : The audio V. fade function is disabled.
5M : The audio V. fade function is enabled. Audio
transitions are faded out and faded in for 5
msec. To reduce noise, this position is
recommended.
PB V. FADE
0
[1]
2
OFF
[5M]
10M
219
SEARCH REC CH
[0]
1
2
[CH1/CH2]
CH3/CH4
CH1+3/
Selects the signal source for recording onto the
linear audio tracks
CH1/CH2
:Records CH1 audio on the linear
track's L channel and CH2 audio
on the linear track's R channel.
:Records CH3 audio on the linear
track's L channel and CH4 audio
on the linear track's R channel.
CH2+4
CH3/CH4
10M : The audio V. fade function is enabled.
Audio transitions are faded out and faded in
for 10 msec.
CH1+3/CH2+4 :Records mixed CH1 and CH3
audio on the linear track's L
channel and mixed CH2 and CH4
audio on the linear track's R
channel.
215
AUD REC VOLUME
MODE 1
[0]
1
[CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4]
MAS-1 BAL-2/
MAS-3 BAL-4
Selects whether the [AUDIO REC LEVEL] controls
operate on individual channels or stereo pairs.
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4: Each of the 4 channels can
be adjusted independently with the
221
222
SEARCH PB AT
1+3/2+4
[0]
1
[MUTING OFF] Selects whether or not the audio recorded on the
MUTING ON
corresponding [AUDIO REC LEVEL] volume
control.
linear track is output during search when menu
switch No. 219 <SEARCH REC CH> is set to
CH1+2/CH3+4.
MUTING OFF: Audio is output.
MUTING ON : Audio is not output.
MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4: In this mode two
stereo pairs are formed: (CH1,CH2) and
(CH3,CH4). Each pair has one Master
Record Level and a Channel Balance control.
The controls labeled CH1 and CH3 operate as
a Master Record Level for their corresponding
pair. The controls labeled CH2 and CH4
operate as Balance Controls for their
Selects the mixing method for the audio channels
being monitored.
AVERAGE : Low level (arithmetical mean)
MONITOR MIX
MODE
[0]
1
2
[AVERAGE]
RMS
ADDITION
corresponding pair. This menu setting allows
changing the recording level without changing
the stereo image, or vice versa.
RMS
: Medium level (geometrical mean)
ADDITION : High level (simple addition)
50
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
223
CH3/4 OUT SEL
AT 2CH
[0]
1
[MUTING]
CH1/CH2
237
EMBEDDED
AUDIO
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
When audio recorded only on CH1 and CH2 with
the BR-D40, BR-D80, BR-D85 or BR-D750 is
played back, select whether or not to output this
audio on CH3 and CH4 as well.
Disables the embedded audio signal from the SDI
output signal
Selects whether or not digital audio signals are
output from the rear panel [SERIAL V/A OUT]
connector together with the video signals.
OFF: Digital signals are not output.
ON : Digital signals are output.
MUTING : Audio is not output.
CH1/CH2 : Audio is output. Signals on CH1 are
output to CH3 and signals on CH2 are
output to CH4. The audio level meter
does not move.
247
DIG AUD AT
ASYNC IN
[0]
1
[NORMAL]
NOISE
REDUCE
Noise will be generated in embedded audio signals
if the embedded audio signals are input from a
different system than the reference sync signals, or
if no reference sync signals are input. This switch
allows you to specify whether or not to remove this
noise (effective only when the SA-D95 is installed).
224
225
226
227
AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH1
0
1
–6DB
0DB
Selects the analog audio reference input level.
Sets each of the four channels (CH1 to CH4).
–6DB : Sets the reference level to –6dB.
0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB.
4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB.
–20DB : Sets the reference level to –20dB.
AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH2
[2]
3
[4DB]
–20DB
NORMAL
:Noise is not removed. Normally
set to this position.
AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH3
NOISE REDUCE :Processes the audio signal to
reduce noise.
AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH4
251
CH3/4 SOURCE
SEL.
[0]
1
[CH3pSW/
CH4pSW]
CH3pCH1/
CH4pSW
CH3pSW/
CH4pCH2
CH3pCH1/
CH4pCH2
CH3pSW/CH4pSW: CH3 and CH4 audio input
signals are determined by the front panel’s
audio signal select buttons.
CH3pCH1/CH4pSW: CH3 audio input signals
come from the same source as CH1 audio
input signals.
CH4 audio input signals are determined by the
front panel’s audio signal select buttons.
CH3pSW/CH4pCH2: CH3 audio input signals
are determined by the front panel’s audio
signal select buttons.
CH4 audio input signals come from the same
source as CH2 audio input signals.
CH3pCH1/CH4pCH2: CH3 audio input signals
come from the same source as CH1 audio
input signals.
228
229
230
231
AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH1
0
1
–6DB
0DB
Selects the analog audio reference output level.
Sets each of the four channels (CH1 to CH4).
-6DB : Sets the reference level to -6 dB.
0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB.
4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB.
AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH2
[2]
[4DB]
2
AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH3
3
AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH4
Selects the reference level of the audio output from
the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR] connector.
-6DB : Sets the reference level to -6dB.
0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB.
4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB.
232
233
AUDIO MON
LEVEL LCH
0
1
–6DB
0DB
AUDIO MON
LEVEL RCH
[2]
[4DB]
236
PRO 48K S.R.
CONV.
[0]
1
[AUTO]
ON
Enables the sampling rate converter even when
the input signal is a professional 48K AES/EBU
signal.Always ON for digital audio signals
conforming to other specifications.
AUTO : The sampling rate converter is set to
OFF.
The CH4 audio input signals come from the same
source as CH2 audio input signals.
Use this position normally.
ON :The sampling rate converter is forced
ON.
Set to this menu position when the incoming
AES/EBU signal cannot be externally
synchronized (audio signal is not in sync with
video signal).
52
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
253
CH1 REC SIGNAL
SEL
0
[1]
SILENCE
[1 kHz SINE]
Selects audio signals to output from the built-in
signal generator. Setting is possible for each
channel.
SILENCE :No signal
1 kHz SINE :Outputs audio signals with the
frequency of 1 kHz.
When the unit remains in the Record Pause, Still or
Stop (Standby ON) mode for a long time, the Tape
Protection mode is engaged automatically. This
switch lets you determine how long (1 sec. to 5
min.) the unit will remain in one of these modes
before the Tape Protection mode is engaged.
In the Record Pause and Still modes, the tape is
advanced by 1 frame when the selected duration
has passed.
307
PAUSE/STILL/
STP/TIME
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
[7]
1 SEC
10 SEC
30 SEC
1 MIN
2 MIN
3 MIN
254
255
256
257
CH2 REC SIGNAL
SEL
CH3 REC SIGNAL
SEL
4 MIN
[5 MIN]
CH4 REC SIGNAL
SEL
AUD REF. SIGNAL
LEV.
[0]
1
[–20 dB]
–18 dB
Sets the audio reference level during recording.
–20 dB : Sets the audio recording reference level to
–20 dB.
In the Stop (Standby ON) mode, the Standby OFF
mode is engaged.
–18 dB : Sets the audio recording reference level to
–18 dB.
• The audio level meter reference level indication
changes according to the setting.
311
312
314
AUTO PLAY
AUTO REW
PB/EE MODE
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Selects the mode engaged when the tape reaches
the beginning in the REW mode.
OFF:Stop (STANDBY-ON) is engaged.
ON :PLAY is engaged.
261
AUD SEL. AT
SEARCH
[0]
1
[LINEAR
AUDIO]
DIGITAL
AUDIO
Selects audio signals to output during search.
LINEAR AUDIO : Outputs linear audio.
DIGITAL AUDIO : Outputs digital audio.
• Noise may be heard while the digital search
sound is used. This is normal. It is not a
malfunction.
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Selects the mode engaged when the tape reaches
the end in the PLAY or RECORD mode.
OFF: Stop (standby-on) mode is engaged.
ON : REW is engaged.
[0]
1
[STOP/FF/
REW]
STOP
Selects the modes in which the EE mode is
automatically engaged.
<SYSTEM>
STOP/FF/REW :Engages the EE mode in the
Stop, FF and Rewind modes.
STOP : Engages the EE mode in the Stop mode.
300
DIRECT EJECT
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Enables or disables Direct Eject.
OFF:Eject is enabled only in the Stop
(STANDBY ON/OFF) mode.
ON :Eject is enabled in any mode.
317
9PIN DEVICE ID
0
[1]
JVC D80
[JVC D860/
D92/D95]
DVW-A500
USER
Selects the Device Type ID code returned by the
VCR after receiving a DEVICE TYPE REQUEST
via RS-422 port.
JVC D80 :Replies with ID code for the BR-
D750U/D350U/D80U/D50U/D85U and
Enables/disables entering the search mode
directly.
301
DIRECT SEARCH
BACK SPACE
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
2
3
OFF:The search/jog dials can be used when the
[SEARCH] or [VAR] button is pressed.
ON :Search and jog can be enabled in any mode
except Record.
SETTING
(382-385)
BR-D51U.
*Set to “JVC D80” when using the RM-G820 editing
remote controller.
JVC D860/D92/D95: Replies with ID code for the
BR-D860U/D560U/D92U/D95U.
DVW-A500 :Replies with ID code for the DVW-
A500.
302
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Enables or disables backspace editing using the
Record, Pause and Play buttons.
OFF: No backspacing after Record Pause
ON : Backspacing after Record Pause.
USER SETTING(382-385):Replies with ID code set
with menu switches No.382 to No.385.
When set to OFF, recording will start more quickly
than when set to ON. However, transitional picture
quality is affected at the start of recording.
319
FF/REW
MAX SPEED
[0]
1
2
[x60]
x32
x17
Selects the maximum tape speeds in FF and REW.
X60: The maximum tape speed is 60 times normal.
X32: The maximum tape speed is 32 times normal.
X17: The maximum tape speed is 17 times normal.
54
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
Selects whether or not self-diagnosis is executed
when the power is turned on.
320
PREROLL TIME
0
0SEC
Sets the preroll time when the [PREROLL] button is
pressed.
357
DIAG AT
POWER ON
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
[5]
15
[5SEC]
15SEC
The preroll time can be selected from 0 second to
15 seconds.
OFF: Self-diagnosis is not executed.
ON : Self-diagnosis is executed.
However, if no tape is loaded when the power is
turned on, self-diagnosis does not take place.
While diagnostics are running (“DIAGNOSTIC”
blinks on the screen), you cannot load a cassette.
Do not try to forcibly load it.
After completion of diagnostics, a warning
indication is shown if there is an abnormality.
Refer to “Warnings with Indicators” on page 145.
323
328
340
PREROLL END
MODE
0
[1]
STANDBY-ON Selects which operation mode is engaged after
[STILL]
preroll is executed.
STANDBY-ON : Engages the Standby ON mode.
STILL
: Engages the Still mode.
EDIT POINT
CLEAR
0
[1]
DISABLE
[ENABLE]
Selects whether the edit point data is cleared after
performing the edit
DISABLE : The edit point is not cleared.
ENABLE : The edit point is cleared.
359
363
JOG FEELING
(REMOTE)
[0]
1
2
3
4
[TYPE-1]
TYPE-2
TYPE-3
TYPE-4
TYPE-5
Alters the operation “feel” of the connected
editing controller's jog dial.
Five settings (TYPE-1 (0) to TYPE-5 (4)) are
available.
Selects the maximum search speed when using
the search dial.
X32 :Maximum search speed is +/-32 times
SEARCH SPEED
[
0]
1
3
[x 32]
x 17
x 6
normal.
This menu changes the characteristics of the VCR
to match specific types of controllers.
CONTROLLER
SELECT
[0]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[DEFAULT]
RM-450
X17 :Maximum search speed is +/-17 times
normal.
NOT DEFINED
NOT DEFINED
NOT DEFINED
NOT DEFINED
NOT DEFINED
NOT DEFINED
DEFAULT :Normally set to this position. This
position is ready for standard editing
controllers.
RM-450 :Set to this position for an editing remote
controller which outputs JOG
commands for synchronization.
(e.g.) SONY RM-450
NOT DEFINED - TYPE-7: Not defined.
X6 :Maximum search speed is +/-6 times
normal.
Selects whether or not the preread function is
activated. Video and audio preread functions
can be set independently.
351
PREREAD
[0]
1
[VID-OFF/
AUD-OFF]
VID-ON/
AUD-OFF
VID-OFF/
AUD-ON
VID-ON/
VID-OFF/AUD-OFF :Both video and audio
preread are disabled.
VID-ON/AUD-OFF :Only video preread is
enabled.
VID-OFF/AUD-ON :Only audio preread is
enabled.
VID-ON/AUD-ON :Both video and audio
preread are enabled.
2
Selects whether or not editing aborts when the
audio condition degrades during PREROLL.
OFF:Does not stop editing.
ON :Stops editing. Error message is shown on the
counter display.
367
368
EDIT INTER-
RUPTION
(525)
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
3
AUD-ON
* When using the [REC] button to start
recording, be sure to set this switch to “VID-
OFF/AUD-OFF”.
STARTING PIC
FREEZE
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Selects playback pictures or a still image as the
video output until the servo locks.
* When this menu switch is set to “ON” and
playback starts from a still image containing the
block noise, still images containing block noise
are output until the servo indicator lights.
To avoid this, obtain a clear still image before
starting playback (using the jog dial or frame
advance/reverse buttons).
OFF:A playback picture is displayed. The picture
may be noisy until the servo stabilizes.
ON :A still image is displayed. This changes to
playback video when the servo stabilizes.
352
AUD PREREAD
TIMING
[0]
1
[NORMAL]
OFF SET
Selects whether or not to apply correction during
audio preread. Correction is based on output audio
phase delay set with the audio control menu
<AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE>.
NORMAL :Does not apply correction.
OFF SET :Applies correction to the output audio
phase according to the delay of the
connected video device.
56
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
<TIME CODE>
Item
Setting
Item
Menu SW On-screen
Setting
Counter On-screen
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
369
PARA-RUN
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Allows daisy chaining of several VCR’s via the
[REMOTE IN (9P)] and [REMOTE OUT (9P)]
connectors, enabling you to control all connected
VCRs at the simultaneously.
375
AUD EDIT
PRESET CH1
0
[1]
2
NO DEFINITION This mode allows edit controllers that have only two
audio channel capabilities to edit all four audio
[CH1]
channels. The audio insert edit command is
translated using the definition set by this menu to
perform CH1 through CH4 edits.
CH2
CH1 OR CH2
3
OFF:Set to this position to control the VCR
independently.
ON :Set to this position for a simultaneous
operation.
376
AUD EDIT
PRESET CH2
0
1
[2]
3
NO DEFINITION
CH1
[CH2]
NO DEFINITION: Accepts no command.
CH1 :Executes insert edit of the channel selected
when the CH1insert command appears.
CH2 :Executes insert edit of the channel selected
when the CH2 insert command appears.
CH1 OR CH2 :Executes insert edit of the channel
selected when the CH1 or CH2
CH1 OR CH2
Apply this menu setting to all connected VCR's.
377
378
AUD EDIT
PRESET CH3
[0]
1
[NO
DEFINITION]
371
372
INPUT SELECT
SAFETY
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Switches ON a safety function to prevent
accidental change of input router
OFF:Disactivates this function. Signal is switched
when an input switch is pressed.
ON :Activates this function. To change the input
signal selection, press the input switch while
pressing the [SHIFT] button.
insert command appears.
AUD EDIT
PRESET CH4
2
3
CH1
CH2
CH1 OR CH2
Selects jog dial operation response level.
381
JOG FEELING
(LOCAL)
[0]
1
[NORMAL]
INSENSITIVE
NORMAL
: Normally set to this position.
INSENSITIVE : Slower than NORMAL mode.
P+R AT
SWAP MODE
[0]
1
[ENABLE]
DISABLE
Selects whether or not simultaneous operation of
the player and recorder is permitted by pressing
the [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons together
during swap editing.
ENABLE :Simultaneous operation for the player
and recorder is possible.
DISABLE :Simultaneous operation is not possible.
Before operation, select the VCR with
the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button.
Sets the ID reply code when menu switch No.317
<9 PIN DEVICE ID> is set to “3: USER SETTING
(382-385)”. Specify a hexadecimal 4-digit ID code
with these four menu switches (set each digit with
each corresponding menu switch). Select
hexadecimal digits (0 to F).
382
383
9 PIN IDⅢ---(1ST)
0
0
[15]
[F]
9 PIN ID-Ⅲ--(2ND)
0
[1]
0
[1]
15
F
384
9 PIN ID--Ⅲ-(3RD)
0
[1]
0
[1]
373
374
MATCH FRAME
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
This setting determines whether or not the
automatic match frame function is used.
OFF: Match-frame is disabled.
15
0
F
0
ON : Match-frame is enabled.
385
386
9 PIN ID---Ⅲ(4TH)
After an edit has been executed, the edit-out points
of both the player and recorder are automatically
registered as edit-in points for the next edit.
[15]
[F]
Even when the PB mode is selected with the [PB
PB/EE] button, the EE mode is engaged when no
tape is loaded.
MUTING AT NO TAPE
[0]
1
[DISABLE]
ENABLE
MENU OPEN
SAFETY
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Selects the method for opening the menu.
OFF:Pressing the [MENU] button engages the
menu switch setting mode.
ON :Pressing the [MENU] + [SHIFT] buttons
simultaneously engages the menu setting
mode.
In this case, this switch is used to select whether
the audio and video signals are output or not.
DISABLE :The audio and video signals are output.
ENABLE :The audio and video signals are not
output.
58
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
Selects a line in the vertical interval from line 10-20
for VITC time code insertion.
Sets the location for the first VITC line, which will
be inserted in the vertical interval.
400
VITC LINE-1
SEL (525)
0
10
387
CF FLAG REPLY
(525)
[1]
2
[4 FLD]
2 FLD OR
4 FLD
When color framing lock is applied, the STATUS
DATA CF lock bit transmitted from the 9-pin remote
connector is set to ON. This switch selects the field
unit where the CF lock bit is set to ON.
• NTSC
4FLD :The bit is set to ON with 4-field unit.
2FLD OR 4FLD: The bit is set to ON with 2 or
4-field unit.
OFF : The bit is set to OFF at all times.
• PAL
8FLD: The bit is set to ON with 8-field unit.
4FLD OR 8FLD :The bit is set to ON with 4 or
8-field unit.
5
[6]
15
[16]
3
OFF
387p
CF FLAG REPLY
(625)
[0]
1
[8 FLD]
4 FLD OR
8 FLD
2 FLD OR
4 FLD OR
8 FLD
10
0
20
7
Selects a line in the vertical interval from lines 7 to
22 for VITC time code insertion.
Sets the location for the first VITC line, which will
be inserted in the vertical interval.
2
400p
VITC LINE-1
SEL (625)
11
[12]
13
14
15
18
[19]
20
21
22
3
OFF
2FLD OR 4FLD OR 8FLD : The bit is set to ON
with 2, 4 or 8-field unit.
OFF: The bit is set to OFF at all times.
401
VITC LINE-2
SEL (525)
0
10
Selects a line in the vertical interval from line 10-22
for VITC time code insertion.
Sets the location for the second VITC line, which
will be inserted in the vertical interval.
389
MULTI CUE
MODE
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
Selects whether or not the multi cue-up function is
used.
OFF:Multi cue-up function is disabled. The normal
mode is engaged.
ON : The Multi Cue mode is engaged.
For more information about the multi cue-up
function, see page 92.
7
[8]
9
17
[18]
19
10
20
401p
402
VITC LINE-2
SEL (625)
0
7
Selects a line in the vertical interval from lines 7 to
22 for VITC time code insertion.
Sets the location for the second VITC line, which
will be inserted in the vertical interval.
Sets according to the player VCR during swap
editing.
Normally set to “AUTO”.
AUTO :Set to this position when a BR-D95U, BR-
D92, BR-D52 or DVW-A500 is connected.
TYPE 1 to TYPE 9 : Not used.
390
391
SWAP VTR
SELECT
[0]
1
[AUTO]
TYPE 1
13
[14]
15
20
[21]
22
9
TYPE 9
Sets the CTL counter to operate in the NONDROP
or the DROP frame mode.
CTL DF SELECT
(525)
[0]
1
2
[TCG SETTING]
NON DROP
DROP
SYNCHRO-
NIZATION
0
[1]
DISABLE
[ENABLE]
Selects whether or not the BR-D95U's built-in editor
issues capstan bump commands for frame
accurate swap editing.
DISABLE :The bump function does not operate.
ENABLE :The bump function operates. (Set the
preroll time to 5 seconds or more).
TCG SETTING:Non-drop Frame mode is engaged
when the [DF/NDF] switch on the
sub panel is set to NDF. If it is set
to “DF”, the Drop Frame mode is
engaged.
393
395
SYNC GRADE
AUTO-EE
[0]
1
2
3
[ACCURATE] Selects the editing accuracy during swap editing.
NON DROP :Non-drop Frame mode is
engaged.
+/-1 FRAME
+/-2 FRAME
ROUGH
ACCURATE : 0 frame
+/-1FRAME : +1 frame
+/-2FRAME : +2 frames
DROP
:Drop Frame mode is engaged.
ROUGH
: Rough
403
REGEN MODE
[0]
1
2
[TC&UB]
TC
UB
Selects what elements of time the code (TC, UB)
are regenerated.
Selects TC or UB in the Time Code Regeneration
mode.
[0]
1
[RECORDER Selects whether the BR-D95U automatically
ONLY]
AUTO-EE
switches from Playback to EE for single monitor
operation during swap editing.
RECORDER ONLY :Disables the auto EE function.
AUTO-EE :Enables the auto EE function. When
the player is selected, this unit enters
the EE mode and the player’s output
TC&UB :Regenerates time code and user bits.
TC
:Regenerates time code only. Preset UB
data are recorded onto the user bits.
:Regenerates user bits only. Preset TC
data are recorded onto the time code.
signals are automatically passed
through and displayed (this function is
useful for editing with only one monitor).
UB
60
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
[ ] : Factory setting
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Item
Setting
Content
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
No.
display
display
display
No.
display
display
display
409
EXT
REGEN TC
[0]
1
[LTC]
VITC
Selects LTC or VITC as the time code source for
locking the BR-D95’s built-in TC Generator to an
external master TC generator.
LTC :The TC generator locks to the LTC data
from the rear panel connector labeled TC
IN.
When user bit data is TC-preset, the data is stored
in memory. Selects whether or not the user bit
data is automatically preset based on the stored
user bit data when the power is turned on.
OFF: The UB auto preset function is disabled.
ON : The UB auto preset function is enabled.
* When this is set to ON, user bit data from the
9-pin remote controller cannot be preset.
457
UB PRESET
AUTO
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
VITC :The TC generator locks to the VITC data
from the rear panel connector labeled VIDEO IN.
410
AUTO REGEN
MODE
[0]
1
2
[ASM+INS]
ASM
INS
Selects the edit mode in which time code is
regenerated (even if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch
is set to “PRESET”).
ASM+INS :Regenerates in the Assemble and
Insert modes.
<ON-SCREEN>
With these menu
switches, the
menu switch
setting screen
changes to the
normal on-
screen data
display.
The actual
501
CHARA
H POSITION
[0]
6
Selects the On-Screen data display's horizontal
position from 7 possible locations.
The factory default position [0] is at the extreme
right of the monitor display. The position shifts
leftward as the numbers increase.
3
0FF
ASM
INS
OFF
:Regenerates in the Assemble mode.
:Regenerates in the Insert mode.
:The setting of the [PRESET/REGEN]
switch is used.
502
CHARA
V POSITION
[0]
11
Selects the On-Screen data display’s vertical
position from 12 possible locations.
The factory-set 0 position is at the bottom of the
monitor display. The position shifts upward as the
numbers increase.
When menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION
SELECT> is set to “TIME+MODE” or “TIME+SUB
TC”, the position set with 10 is the same as that
with 11.
421
450
TCG CF FLAG
[0]
1
2
[OFF]
ON
AUTO
Selects whether the color frame flag is set to ON or
OFF for a vacant bit in the time code.
position of the
on-screen data
display is
OFF :Sets the color frame flag to OFF.
ON :Sets the color frame flag to ON.
AUTO :Sets the color frame flag to ON or OFF
according to the relationship between the
video signals being recorded and the color
framing of the time code. (See page 106)
moved.
When menu switch No. 504 is set to “TIME+SUB
TC+MODE”, the position set with 9 or 10 is the
same as 11.
Selects incoming VITC or memory preset as the
source of the data recorded onto the Sub-Time
Code
OFF:“00.00.00.00” is always recorded on the sub
time code.
SUB TC(VITC)
REC
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
* If this menu switch is set to “OFF” and menu
switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to
“OFF” or “TC”, the on-screen sub time code
indication will not advance in the Play mode.
This is the case even when playing back a tape
with sub time code recorded.
504
INFORMATION
SELECT
0
[1]
3
TIME
Selects on-screen display data.
[TIME+MODE]
TIME+SUB TC
TIME+SUB TC
+MODE
ON :Input VITC is recorded in sub time code.
TIME
:Displays time data only.
TIME+MODE :Displays time data and mode data.
TIME+SUB TC:Displays time data and sub time
data.
TIME+SUB TC+MODE: Displays time data, sub
time data and mode data.
4
451
452
VITC OUT
SELECT
0
[1]
2
SUB TC
[TC]
OFF
Selects the source for the VITC TC
superimposed on video output signal.
SUB TC :Sub time code is delivered to the
output VITC.
* A slight delay occurs in the displayed time code
data. Do not dub the on-screen data as it is to a
tape for off-line editing.
TC
:Main time code is delivered to the
output VITC.
OFF
:VITC is not output.
SEARCH LTC
0
[1]
OFF
[ON]
Enables or disables LTC output in the shuttle
Search mode.
LTC is output from the [TC OUT] connector.
OFF:LTC is output only in X1 tape speed.
*LTC is not output in the Program Playback
mode.
505
REMAIN ENABLE
[0]
1
[DISABLE]
ENABLE
Selects whether of not the tape remaining informa-
tion is displayed on screen.
DISABLE :Not displayed.
ENABLE :Displayed. For display contents, refer
to page 23.
ON :LTC is output in all search speed modes.
(Continuous time code is not available).
62
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 PREPARATION
5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS
6-1 OPERATION MODE LOCK
5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT
This unit is provided with an operation mode lock facility. This function prevents accidental changes to switch and
control settings. When this function is ON, currently selected modes and knob or switch positions cannot be
adjusted.
[ ] : Factory setting
Item
Setting
Content
Menu SW On-screen
Counter On-screen
● Use menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK> to enable this function.
No.
display
display
display
● With this function enabled, operation of all front panel control buttons, adjustment knobs, dials and switches is
disabled and changes to menu switch settings are not possible. When this function is activated, it is not possible
to change menu switch settings. However, the [PHONES LEVEL] control and menu switch No. 002
<OPERATION LOCK> (to release the operation mode lock function) can be used.
Selects whether “MUTING” or “CONDITION
ALARM” messages appear On-Screen.This menu
makes it easier to check the VCR’s operation
status.
512
MUTING/ALARM
MESSAGE
[0]
1
[OFF]
ON
The on-screen display is shown on the monitor
connected to the [VIDEO MONITOR OUT]
connector.
Procedure
OFF:The “MUTING” and “CONDITION ALARM”
are not displayed.
[SEARCH] button
ON :The “MUTING” and “CONDITION ALARM”
are displayed.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
For more details, refer to the “MUTING/
CONDITION ALARM” display on page 24.
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
513
EDIT ON
SCREEN
0
OFF
[ON]
Selects whether the edit on-screen display is ON or
OFF during editing. On-screen information is output
from the [LINE2 SUPER OUT] connector.
OFF:Does not show the edit on-screen display
during editing.
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
[1]
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
ON :Show the edit on-screen display during
editing.
[MENU] button
[SET] button
[HOLD] button
Jog dial
<TBC. FRAME MEMORY>
601 V.BLANK MASK
0
[1]
2
OFF
[ON]
ON WITH
0.5H
Enables/disables masking of the vertical interval.
OFF
ON
:No masking.
:Masks the vertical interval.
1. Make all desired settings and operate as usual.
ON WITH 0.5H :Masks section for 0.5H in addition
to the vertical interval (analog
2. Engage the operation lock function.
signals only).
Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu setting display.
Turn the jog dial and select menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK>.
* When this menu is set to “OFF”, only the
recordable sections of the signals output for V.
blanking in the EE mode are output (VITC,
EXTRA LINE, EXTENSION LINE).
When this menu is set to “ON”, VITC and EXTRA
LINE have priority in each menu setting (refer to
page 89).
If the Direct Access facility is ON, press the [STAND BY] button to call up the
menu item display more quickly.
3
Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
Press the [SET] button.
The operation lock function is ON.
After the SET indication blinks for several seconds, the normal counter and
on-screen displays are restored.
Selects whether or not the multi-generation test
“Dubbing Loop Function” is used to aid adjusting an
analog component system to unity gain. When this
mode is active, the VCR automatically switches to
its internal color bar generator and continuously
builds the number of generations selected.
620
DUBBING LOOP
[0]
1
2
3
[OFF]
3 TIMES
5 TIMES
10 TIMES
OFF
: The dubbing loop function is disabled.
3. To cancel the operation mode lock facility, set menu switch No. 002
<OPERATION LOCK> to “OFF (0)”.
3 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly
builds 3 generations every few seconds.
5 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly
builds 5 generations every few seconds.
10 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly
builds 10 generations every few
seconds.
* When set to any setting except OFF (0), this unit
enters the Dubbing Loop mode.
* For more details on the dubbing loop function,
refer to page 122.
64
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 PREPARATION
6 PREPARATION
6-3 LOADING AND UNLOADING THE CASSETTE
6-2 STANDBY ON/OFF
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
LINE
CPN
L
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
R
[POWER]
switch
OFF
O
OFF
O
Variable Motion
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
A O
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525 CONDITION
625
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
0
0
0
0
U
T
O
FF
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
P.PLAY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
[PB PB/EE] button
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
TC
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X1
X-1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3
REC
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
REV
FWD
[EJECT] button
Notes
[STANDBY] button
● Output mode selection in
the Standby ON/OFF mode
Notes
Two different sub modes are available in the Stop mode.
Loading the cassette
Pressing the [PB PB/EE]
button switches between
Still output or the EE mode.
The counter display
changes to “PB” or “PB/
EE”.
● To call up the on-screen
display, set the [ON
SCREEN] switch on the
sub panel to “ON”. On-
screen data are output
through the rear panel
[LINE2-SUPER] connector.
1. Turn the [POWER] switch on.
[ The counter display is illuminated.
Standby ON mode: The tape is loaded and the head drums are rotating, permitting
quick start of operation when another mode is engaged.
The [STANDBY] button is illuminated.
* If a cassette is not loaded, the counter display indicates “No Tape” and the
on-screen display indicates “NO TAPE”. These are not shown when setting the
menu switches.
In the EE mode, the input
signal can be monitored.
Standby OFF mode: The tape is loaded but the drums are stationary. The tape
and the heads are protected against damage in this mode.
The [STANDBY] button’s light goes out.
● Be sure to use only
cassette tapes.
VHS/S-VHS cassettes
cannot be used.
2. Load the cassette.
If tape tension is slack, tighten it before inserting the cassette. Insert the
cassette with the cassette label facing you. Press the center of the cassette
gently until the loading mechanism takes over.
[ The cassette is automatically drawn into the slot and the [STOP] button
lights.
When the cassette is fully loaded, the Standby ON mode is engaged and the
[STANDBY] button lights.
*When a cassette tape with the REC switch set to OFF is loaded, “REC Inh” is
shown on the tape counter display for about 2 seconds.
● When video and audio
signals are output from the
built-in signal generator;
The Output mode in the Standby ON and OFF modes can be selected with the [PB/
EE] button (see notes for details).
To output video signals
from the signal generator,
press the [VIDEO INPUT]
button so that all [VIDEO
INPUT] indicators light.
Select the video signal type
from the signal generator
with menu switch No. 111
<VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>.
Procedure
Ⅲ Standby ON mode is engaged when the cassette is loaded or when the Stop
mode is engaged with the STOP button.
● Conditional EJECT
operation
Ⅲ To change the Standby ON mode to the Standby OFF mode, press the
[STANDBY] button.
[ The [STANDBY] button goes out, indicating that the Standby OFF mode has
When menu switch No.
301 <DIRECT EJECT> is
set to “OFF (0)”, the
[EJECT] button is enabled
only in the Standby ON or
OFF mode.
With this switch set to “ON
(1)”, tapes can be ejected
in any mode.
Unloading the cassette
To output audio signals
(1 kHz, sine wave) from the
signal generator, set menu
switches No. 253 to No.
256 <CH1 to 4 REC
SIGNAL SEL.> to “1 kHz
SINE” and press the audio
signal select buttons to
select the required
1. Press the [EJECT] button.
[ The cassette is ejected.
The CTL counter is reset.
been engaged.
Ⅲ To change the Standby OFF mode to Standby ON mode, press the [STANDBY]
button.
[ The [STANDBY] button is illuminated, indicating that the Standby ON mode
2. Remove the cassette from the slot.
has been engaged.
Precautions
* The Standby ON mode is automatically switched to the Standby OFF mode
after about 5 minutes to protect the tape and the heads. The time when the
Standby OFF mode is engaged can be selected with menu switch No. 307
<PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.
●Do not insert anything other than a cassette into the slot.
●Do not try to remove the cassette once automatic cassette loading has begun.
Wait until loading is complete, then press the [EJECT] button.
channels. The
corresponding [AUDIO
INPUT] indicators will light.
● In the PB mode, pressing
the [REC] button allows
you to monitor the input
signal. Pressing the
[STOP] button restores the
Play mode.
66
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 RECORDING
7 RECORDING
7-1 PREPARATION FOR RECORDING
7-2 INPUT VIDEO AND AUDIO SIGNAL SELECTION
The video and audio input signal select method is different depending on the setting of menu switch No. 371 <INPUT
SELECT SAFETY>. The procedure when menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT SAFETY> is set to “OFF” is
described below.
When this unit is synchro-
nized externally
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
Audio channel indicators
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
[AUDIO INPUT] button
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
ON
I
REMOTE indicator (when using the
remote control unit)
L
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
INPUT
R
A
N
A
L
O
G
INPUT
OFF
O
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
LINE
CPN
Variable Motion
Variable Motion
When recording wide aspect
screen ID (menu switch No. 103)
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
Counter mode
indicators
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
VIDEO INPUT
indicator
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
VCON
REMOTE
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
UB
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
+4
+4
+4
+4
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+4
+4
+4
+4
+2
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
ANALOG
MENU
REC
SET
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
R
0
0
0
0
–2
–2
–2
–2
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–4
–4
–4
–4
H
M
S
F
–60
–60
–60
–60
–4
–4
–4
–4
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
–60
–60
–60
–60
X1
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
AY
X-1
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
INSERT
REC
525
625
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
CTL TC UB
GEN 16:9
REMOTE
CONDITION
INSERT
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
[VIDEO INPUT] button
Audio signal select buttons
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Audio input
connector names
Ⅲ Input video signal selection
● Changing the video and
audio input signal select
method
Set menu switch No. 371
<INPUT SELECT SAFETY> to
“ON (1)” to prevent the setting
from being changed acciden-
tally.
When set to “ON (1)”, the input
signal select methods are as
follows.
• Video signal: Press the
[VIDEO INPUT] button while
pressing the [SHIFT] button.
• Audio signal: Press the audio
signal select button while
pressing the [SHIFT] button.
Front panel switch setting
● Audio items
Select the signal from rear panel video input connector or built-in signal generator.
• Audio recording level adjustment mode selection
No. 215 <AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1>
For details, refer to page 50.
1. Press the [VIDEO INPUT] button to select the video signal.
The [VIDEO INPUT] indicator corresponding to the pressed button lights.
SIF :Input a serial digital video signal to the rear panel [SERIAL V/A IN]
connector (effective only when the optional SA-D95U digital interface
board is installed).
LINE :Input composite video signals to the rear panel [COMPOSITE LINE IN]
connector.
CPN :Input component video signals to the rear panel [COMPONENT IN] connector.
SIF, LINE, CPN lit simultaneously: Records a color bar, black picture, multi
burst or pulse & bar from the built-in signal generator (select with menu
switch No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>).
Blinking :The indicator blinks if no signal is input or if the wrong type of signal is
input.
1. Select the input video signal.
2. Select the input audio signal.
3. Select the audio monitor output.
Select the audio monitor output from the rear
panel [AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or the
front panel [PHONES] jack.
• Search audio recording selection
No. 219 <SEARCH REC CH> ..... Page 51
Select the type of audio to be recorded on the cue
track (2 tracks).
• Audio monitor output mode selection
No. 222 <MONITOR MIX MODE> ..... Page 51
Select the way mixed audio is output from the
[AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or
[PHONES] jack.
For details of steps 1 to 3, refer to page 70.
4. Set the tape counter mode.
Set the time data to be shown on the counter
display and on-screen display. “CTL”, “TC” or
“UB” will be shown on the counter display.
• Input audio level selection (by channel from 1 to 4)
No. 224 to No. 227 <AUDIO INPUT LEVEL
CH 1–4> ... Page 52
ⅢWhen composite monochrome signals are input, use the COMPONENT Y input, not the
LINE input. This will minimize degradation during signal processing. In this case, set
menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP> to “HIGH/ON” or “HIGH/OFF” in the [525]
mode.
5. Engage the Remote mode.
To operate this unit locally, press the [REMOTE]
button so that the “REMOTE” indicator on the
counter display goes out.
Select the audio input level of the rear panel
[AUDIO IN] connectors from “+4 dB”, “0 dB”,
“-6 dB” and “-20 dB” for each channel.
● Record pause selection
Ⅲ Input audio signal selection
● When the [AUDIO MONITOR]
button is illuminated, the audio
channel indicator can be used
to select the audio monitor
signal. The orange “L” and “R”
indicators show the audio
monitor output connectors.
● The input source for CH3 and
CH4 audio signals can be
selected with menu switch No.
251 <CH3/4 SOURCE SEL.>.
● When the SDI, AES/EBU, and
ANALOG indicators are lit,
audio signals from the built-in
signal generator are recorded.
Select audio signals from the
built-in signal generator with
menu switches No. 253 to 256
<CH1 to 4 REC SIGNAL
Menu switch setting
This unit is provided with independent four-channel input connectors for
analog audio, serial digital audio (AES/EBU), and SDI audio.
Select the audio signal to be recorded on each of the four audio channels (1to 4).
• Backspacing selection
No. 302 <BACKSPACE> .... Page 54
● Set the relationship between the serial digital
video signal input and AES/EBU input
(Only when the optional SA-D95U digital inter-
face board is installed)
• To input asynchronous professional 48 kHz AES/
EBU signal
No. 236 <PRO 48K S.R.CONV.> ... Page 52
Set to “AUTO” to input a serial digital audio signal
with professional 48 kHz sampling frequency from
a source unit which cannot be genlocked.
Set the menu switches as required.
● Video items
1. Press the [AUDIO INPUT] button so that the [AUDIO INPUT] button is
Reference sync signal items
• Select the reference sync system.
No. 003 <SYNC SELECT> ..... Page 43
Set to “EXT” to synchronize with an external sync
signal.
● Video items
• Wide aspect ID signal selection
No. 103 <WIDE ASPECT ID REC> ... Page 44
• Component video input level selection (NTSConly)
No. 104 <COMPONENT LEVEL> ... Page 44
• Recording a signal from the built-in signal
generator
No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.> ... Page 44
Select a color bar signal, black picture, multi burst
or pulse & bar.
illuminated.
AUDIO
INPUT
● When the [AUDIO INPUT] button is illuminated, the audio channel indicator
can be used to select input audio signal.
2. Select the audio signal to be recorded on each of four audio channels
(1 to 4) by pressing the audio signal select button.
The channel indicator of the selected audio signal lights.
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
/
Notes:
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
•
Audio can only be input to the [AES/EBU] or [SERIAL V/
For time code and editing settings, refer to “10.
HOW TO USE THE TIME CODE” and “11. EDITING”.
AES/EBU
L
A]connectorswhentheoptionalSA-D95Udigitalinterface
board is installed.
SEL.>.
ANALOG
R
•
Always input external sync signals when inputting digital
signals. Bothvideoandaudiomustbesynchronizedwith
the external sync signal.
* This unit cannot be used for sound-on-sound
editing. Inserted audio signals are delayed.
● The channel indicator blinks if
the selected signal does not
conform to the standard.
(Illustrated example)
•
•
•
•
The first audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AES/EBU CH1] connectors is recorded.
The second audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AUDIO IN CH2] connectors is recorded.
The third audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [SERIAL V/A IN] connectors is recorded.
The fourth audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AUDIO IN CH4] connectors is recorded.
68
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 RECORDING
7 RECORDING
7-4 AUDIO RECORD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
7-3 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT SIGNAL SELECTION
Select the audio to be output to the headphones jack or the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR L/R] connectors. Select
a single channel or mixed audio from the four available channels. During playback, select the playback audio monitor
output signal.
● Audio signal recording level can be adjusted.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
L channel
Channel indicators
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
[REC] volume controls
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
INPUT
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
Variable Motion
REC
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
LINE
CPN
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
AUDIO
MONITOR
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
AES/EBU
L
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
P.PLAY
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
–4
–4
–4
–4
METER MODE
–60
–60
–60
–60
ANALOG
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
[AUDIO MONITOR]
button
X1
X-1
FINE
TRACKING
R
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
2
1
CH1
CH4
CH2 CH3
R channel
Audio signal select buttons
● The recording level of this unit can be adjusted either fixedly or manually.
● Recording level adjustment
in the Standby mode is
possible in the EE mode.
To adjust the recording level, pull out the [REC] volume controls to engage the
Manual mode and push in them to engage the Fixed (Unity) mode.
Either mode can be selected independently for each audio channel.
1. Press the [AUDIO MONITOR] button so that the [AUDIO MONITOR] button
is illuminated.
AUDIO
MONITOR
● When the [AUDIO MONITOR] button is illuminated, the audio channel
● During recording or audio
level adjustment, audio can
be monitored via the rear
panel [AUDIO MONITOR]
connectors or the front
panel [PHONES] jack. For
monitor output, refer to
page 70.
● When the [AUDIO INPUT]
button is illuminated, the
channel indicator can be
used to select the input
audio signal.
indicator can be used for the audio monitor output signal.
Fixed recording level adjustment
Push in the [REC] volume controls to engage the Unity mode for recording level
adjustment.
● In the Unity mode, the [R] indicator on the upper section of the meter lights. This
means that adjustment is not possible with the [REC] volume controls.
2. Select the audio monitor output signal by pressing the audio signal select
button.
Select the audio signal from CH 1 to CH 4 to be output to the L and R channels
of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and the headphones jack.
The selected channel indicator lights.
Manual recording level adjustment
● When menu switch No. 215
[AUD REC VOLUME
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
/
● Pull out the [REC] volume controls to engage the Manual mode for recording
level adjustment.
In the Manual mode, the [R] indicator on the upper section of the meter goes out.
MODE1] is set to “MAS-1
BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4”, the
master level adjust and
balance adjust functions
assigned to each volume
control are enabled even if
the corresponding channel
is in the Unity mode.
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
AES/EBU
L
ANALOG
R
There are two ways to adjust recording levels manually.
Adjust the audio level for each channel independently with the CH1 to CH4
[REC] volume controls.
Use CH1 and CH2 [REC] volume controls as one pair and CH3 and CH4 [REC]
volume controls as one pair. Adjust the audio level with the CH1 and CH3 [REC]
volume controls as a master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 [REC] volume
controls as a balance control.
● Select the output level
mode for audio monitor
mixing output with menu
switch No. 222 <MONITOR
MIX MODE>.
(Illustrated example)
● L channel of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and headphones: Output mixed
audio of the first, second and fourth channels.
● R channel of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and headphones: Output the
audio from the third channel.
2
● Setting the audio monitor
output level
Set the audio monitor L
and R channel output
levels to +4 dB, 0 dB or +6
dB with menu switches No.
232 and No. 233.
Select the adjustment mode with menu switch No. 215 <AUD REC VOLUME
MODE 1>.
Ⅲ Menu switch setting
● Select the manual recording level adjustment mode with menu switch No. 215
<AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1>.
“CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (0)”: To independently adjust the recording level for each
channel with CH1 to CH4 [REC] volume controls.
“MAS-1 BAL-2/,MAS-3 BAL-4 (1)”: Use CH1 and CH3 [REC] volume controls for
master volume control and the CH2 and CH4
● The audio reference level
can be set with menu
switch No. 257 <AUD REF.
SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB or
-18 dB).
[REC] volume controls for balance control.
70
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 RECORDING
7 RECORDING
7-5 BASIC RECORDING OPERATIONS
7-4 AUDIO RECORD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
● The audio level meter’s
reference level indication
changes depending on the
setting of menu switch No.
257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL
LEV.> (-20 dB or -18 dB).
1. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to audio level.
2
• When the [METER MODE TRACKING] button is illuminated, press the
[METER MODE TRACKING] button.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
INPUT
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
1
OFF
O
[The [METER MODE TRACKING] button goes out and the [CH4/TRACKING]
meter can be used for the CH4 audio level.
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
2. Ⅲ Adjust the recording level for each channel (CH1 to CH4) separately with
the [REC] volume control.
4
7
4,6
3
5
• To perform fine adjustment, press the [METER MODE FINE] button.
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
[ The [METER MODE FINE] button is illuminated and the audio
level meter shows the fine level around -20 dBFS or -18 dBFS.
Notes
● Be sure to use only
1. Turn the [POWER] switch “ON”.
2. Load the cassette.
Normal mode level indication
Fine mode level indication
cassette tapes.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
Make sure that the protective slide on the cassette is set to “REC”.
[ The tape is loaded and the “STANDBY” button lights.
VHS/S-VHS cassettes
cannot be used.
dB
OVER
dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
–10
–10
–10
–10
● Recording the video signal
by the internal signal
generator
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
3. Adjust the audio signal recording level.
(See page 69 for audio recording level adjustment.)
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
Select the color bar signal,
black picture multi burst or
pulse & bar signal with
menu switch No. 111 <VD.
REC SIGNAL SEL.> and
press the [VIDEO INPUT]
button so that all [VIDEO
INPUT] indicators light.
4. Start recording.
Press the [PLAY] buttons while pressing the [REC] button.
[ The [REC] and [PLAY] buttons light and recording starts.
• The reference input level shown by the audio level meter is -20 dBFS or
-18 dBFS.
5. To temporarily stop recording
Press the [PAUSE/STILL] button.
[ The [PAUSE/STILL] button lights and recording is paused.
Ⅲ Adjust with the master and balance controls
The CH1 and CH2 [REC] volume controls, and the CH3 and CH4 [REC]
volume controls work as one set.
The CH1 and CH3 [REC] volume controls serve as master volume control and
the CH2 and CH4 volume controls as balance control.
• Turn the CH1 or CH3 [REC] volume control.
6. To re-start recording
Press the [PLAY] button.
[ The [PAUSE/STILL] button goes out and recording starts again.
● Refer to “10 HOW TO USE
THE TIME CODE” for time
code recording.
The audio on CH2 or CH4 changes along with CH1 or CH3.
• Turn the CH2 or CH4 [REC] volume control to adjust the balance between
CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4.
7. To end recording
Press the [STOP] button.
[ The [REC] and [PLAY] buttons indicators go out and the tape stops.
Pair
Pair
The Standby ON mode is automatically engaged when the tape ends.
● When menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> is “ON (1)”, the tape is
automatically rewound to the beginning.
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH4
REC
Balance control
Master volume control
Balance control
Master volume control
● When the Play mode is switched to the E-E mode, the picture slightly shifts
downward for a moment. However, the recording is not affected.
* Even if the frame is advanced periodically in the Record-Pause mode (every 5 minutes
or so), the mode will still disengage after about 20 minutes to protect the heads and
the VCR will automatically enter the Standby Off mode.
You can specify the length of time that elapses before the frame is advanced in the
Record-Pause mode with menu switch No. 307 <PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.
If menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> is set to “ON”, the Record mode cannot be
engaged. For recording, set it to “OFF”.
72
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
7 RECORDING
7-6 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT
8-1 PREPARATION FOR PLAYBACK
3
2
When this unit is
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
synchronized externally
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
INPUT
ON
I
AUDIO
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
MONITOR
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
L
ON
I
A
N
A
L
O
G
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
COMPONENT DIGITAL
LINE
CPN
1
R
L
OFF
O
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
REMOTE indicator
(when using the
remote control unit)
OFF
O
Variable Motion
Counter mode
indicators
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
P
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
UB
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
OVER dB
0
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
+2
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
–2
–2
–2
–2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
0
0
0
0
–4
–4
–4
–4
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–60
–60
–60
–60
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA4
PLAY
DA3
EJECT
E/STILL
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
X1
525
625
CTL TC UB
GEN
CONDITION
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PAUSE/STILL
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
REMOTE
X1
X-1
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Ⅲ This unit does not execute emphasis recording.
Front panel switch setting
When digital audio signals containing emphasis information are input to this
unit, this unit automatically de-emphasizes these signals before recording.
The emphasis function is always OFF when digital audio signals are recorded
on this unit.
1. Select the audio monitor output.
Select the audio monitor output from the rear
panel [AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or the
front panel [PHONES] jack.
● Audio items
• Audio V. fade function selection
Select whether audio noise in transitions should
be reduced or not.
• For the selection procedure, refer to “Audio
monitor output selection” on page 70.
No. 214 <PBV. FADE> ..... Page 50
• Audio output level adjustment mode selection
Select automatic or manual adjustment.
No. 216 <AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1> ... Page 51
• Set the output to CH3 and CH4 when playing
back a tape with two-channel audio (CH1 and
CH2).
Note:
• Analog or digital audio output may not be clear when a tape whose audio
has been recorded on its audio channels with emphasis both ON and OFF
is played back on the BR-D85U/D80U/D51U/D50U/D750U/D350U
DIGITAL S VCR.
2. Set the tape counter mode.
Set the time data to be shown on the counter
display and the on-screen display. “CTL”, “TC” or
“UB” will be shown on the counter display.
No. 223 CH3/4 OUT SEL AT 2CH ... Page 52
• Audio output level setting
Select the reference output level for the audio
output connectors (CH1 to CH4 ) from +4 dB, 0
dB and -6 dB.
No. 228 to No. 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH1 —
CH4> ... Page 52
• Audio monitor output level setting
Select the reference output level for the L and R
audio monitor output channels from +4 dB, 0 dB
and -6 dB.
No. 232 to No. 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL LCH —
RCH>
● Auto Play mode selection
Set whether the tape is automatically played back
from the beginning or not.
● Output picture selection when playback starts
Select the output picture that will be displayed
until the servo has stabilized after starting play
back.
3. Engage the Remote mode.
To operate this unit locally, press the [REMOTE]
button so that the [REMOTE] indicator on the
counter display goes out.
To operate this unit via the RS-422 or RS-232C
serial remote interface, press the [REMOTE]
button so that the [REMOTE] indicator lights.
Ⅲ A sampling rate converter is provided for the BR-D95U’s AES/EBU input. This
enables input of both professional-standard and consumer-standard digital
signals with sampling frequencies of 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 32 kHz. However,
the following signals are muted and cannot be recorded. In this case, the
[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicator blinks.
• Professional mode, CCIT J17
• Consumer mode, data mode ON
• Consumer mode, 4-channel mode
Menu switch setting
Set the menu switches as required.
● Reference sync signal items
• Select the reference sync system.
No. 003 <SYNC SELECT> ..... Page 43
Set to “EXT” to synchronize with an external sync
signal.
● Tracking adjustment selection
• Auto tracking/manual tracking selection
No. 005 “AUTO TRACKING” .... Page 43
● Video items
• Component video output level selection (NTSC
only)
No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP (525)> ... Page 44
• Error correction mode selection
No. 112 <ECC MODE> ... Page 45
Ⅲ Digital audio signal output status bit
The sampling rate converter converts the digital audio signal output status bit
from this unit to professional mode signals with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz and emphasis OFF regardless of the type of input signals.
No. 368 <STARTING PIC FREEZE> ... Page 57
● Setting the video signal vertical blanking period
masking
No. 601 <V. BLANK MASK> ..... Page 64
74
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
8 PLAYBACK
8-2 BASIC PLAYBACK OPERATIONS
8-3. AUDIO PLAYBACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
● Audio signal output levels can be adjusted.
[SERVO] indicator
2
Notes
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
INPUT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
● Masking the video signal
vertical blanking period
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
1
OFF
O
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
INPUT
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
Variable Motion
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
If menu switch No. 601
<V. BLANK MASK> set to
“ON (1)” or “ON WITH
0.5H (2)” the signal
superimposed on the
vertical blanking period will
not be output.
L
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
A
N
A
L
O
G
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
OFF
O
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
P.PLAY
PHONES
TRACKING
Variable Motion
REC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
PAUSE/STILL
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
X1
X-1
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
–4
–4
–4
–4
METER MODE
TRACKING
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
–60
–60
–60
–60
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL
PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
X1
X-1
FINE
CH1
CH2
CH3
REC
CH4
PULL
RELEASE
PHONES
TRACKING
PULL
RELEASE
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
However, VITC or Extra
line data will be output.
2
1
[REC] button
6
4
[PLAY] volume controls
3,5
● Tracking adjustment
1. Turn the [POWER] switch “ON”.
2. Load the cassette.
[ When the tape is loaded, the [STANDBY] button lights to indicate that the
Standby ON mode has been engaged.
* Be sure to use only DIGITAL S cassette tapes. VHS/S-VHS cassettes cannot
be used.
For manual tracking
adjustment, set the menu
switch No. 005 <AUTO
TRACKING> to “OFF (1)”.
The [TRACKING] button
blinks when the level meter
section shows the tracking
meter.
●
Reference output level
selection for the audio
output connectors
Select the playback
audio output reference
level for each channel
from +4 dB, 0 dB and
-6 dB with menu switch
No. 228 to 231.
● Playback levels can be adjusted either fixedly or manually.
To adjust the audio playback level, pull out the [PLAY] volume controls to engage
the Manual mode or push them in to engage the Unity mode.
Either mode can be selected independently for each audio channel.
Audio Playback Level Lock mode
3. Start playback.
Press the [PLAY] button.
[ The [PLAY] button indicator lights and playback starts. The [SERVO]
indicator lights and the picture stabilizes.
Push in the [PLAY] volume controls to engage the Unity mode for playback level
adjustment.
● In the Unity mode, the [P] indicator on the upper section of the meter lights. This
means that adjustment is not possible with the [PLAY] volume controls.
● Output picture selection
when playback starts
Select the picture that will
be output until the capstan
servo and drum servo
stabilize after playback
starts with menu switch
No. 368 <STARTING PIC
FREEZE>.
When this menu switch is
set to “ON”, the freeze
picture displayed before
playback starts is output.
Once the servo is stabi-
lized, output automatically
switches to the playback
picture.
● Play back the section of
tape where control signals
have not been recorded
and set the picture output
with menu switch No. 120
<NO CTL MUTING>.
“OFF”: A freeze picture is
output.
• If menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> is set to “ON (1)”, tracking is
automatically adjusted. As a result, it takes several seconds for the picture
to stabilize after the [SERVO] indicator lights.The [SERVO] indicator blinks
until the servo stabilizes.
Manual audio playback level adjustment
●
Selecting signals for
output from the CH3
CH4 audio connectors
When playing back a
tape recorded on a
2-channel DIGITAL S
VCR, use menu switch
No. 223 <CH3/4 OUT
SEL AT 2CH> to specify
whether or not these
signals are output from
the audio CH3/CH4
connector.
Pull out the [PLAY] volume controls to engage the Manual mode for playback level
adjustment.
In the Manual mode, the [P] indicator on the upper section of the meter goes out.
• The [525] or [625] indicator blinks on the counter display if you try to play
back a tape not recorded in the same signal system as the one set for this
unit.
There are two ways to adjust playback level manually.
Adjust the audio level for each channel independently with the CH1 to CH4
4. To temporarily stop playback
Press the [PAUSE/STILL] button.
[ The [PAUSE/STILL] button lights and the Still mode is engaged.
[PLAY] volume controls.
Use CH1 and CH2 [PLAY] volume controls as one pair and CH3 and CH4
[PLAY] volume controls as one pair. Adjust audio levels using the CH1 and
CH3 [PLAY] volume controls as a master volume control and the CH2 and CH4
[PLAY] volume controls as a balance control.
5. To re-start playback
Press the [PLAY] button.
[ The [PAUSE/STILL] button goes out and playback resumes.
Select the adjustment mode with menu switch No. 216 <AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1>.
6. To stop playback
Press the [STOP] button.
[ The [PLAY] button indicator goes out and the tape stops.
When the [STANDBY] button is pressed, the [STANDBY] button goes out
and the Standby OFF mode is engaged.
● When menu switch No.
216 [AUD PB VOLUME
MODE1] is set to “MAS-1
BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4”, the
master level adjust and
balance adjust functions
assigned to each volume
control are enabled even if
the corresponding channel
is in the Unity mode.
Ⅲ Menu switch setting
• Select the manual playback level adjustment mode with menu switch No. 216
<AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1>.
“CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (0)”: To independently adjust the playback level for each
channel with the CH1 to CH4 [PLAY] volume controls.
“MAS -1 BAL2/MAS-3 BAL-4 (1)”: Use CH1 and CH3 [PLAY] volume controls
for master volume control and the CH2 and
CH4 [PLAY] volume controls for balance
control.
The [PB UNITY] indicator goes out and the Manual Playback Level Adjustment
mode is engaged.
“ON”: A black picture is
output.
The Standby ON mode is automatically engaged when the tape ends. If menu
switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> is “ON (1)”, the tape is automatically rewound to
the beginning.
*
Even if the frame is advanced
periodically in the Still mode
(every 5 minutes or so), the
still mode will disengage after
about 20 minutes to protect the
heads and the VCR will
To monitor input signal during playback
The input signal (both video and audio) can be monitored for as long as the
[REC] button is kept pressed during playback.
Please note that the Record mode is engaged if the [PLAY] button is
pressed together with the [REC] button.
automatically enter the
Standby Off mode. The time
that elapses until the frame is
advanced can be selected with
menu switch No. 307
<PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.
76
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
8 PLAYBACK
8-4 MANUAL TRACKING AJUSTMENT
8-3. AUDIO PLAYBACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
1. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to audio level.
●
The audio level meter’s
reference level
[CH4/TRACKING] meter
• When the [METER MODE TRACKING] button is illuminated or
blinked, press the [METER MODE TRACKING] button.
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
indication changes
depending on the
setting of menu switch
No. 257 <AUD REF.
SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB
or -18 dB).
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
[ The [METER MODE TRACKING] button goes out and the
[CH4/TRACKING] meter can be used for the CH4 audio level.
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
2. Adjust the playback level for each channel (CH1 to CH4) separately with
the [PLAY] volume control.
HOLD
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
• To perform fine adjustment, press the [METER MODE FINE] button.
[ The [METER MODE FINE] button is illuminated and the audio
level meter shows a reference fine level of around -20 dBFS or
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
METER MODE
[TRACKING] adjust knob
[METER MODE TRACKING] button
-18 dBFS.
FINE
TRACKING
This unit is equipped with an automatic tracking facility which operates during
playback to maintain optimum tracking (with menu switch No. 005 <AUTO
TRACKING> set to “ON (1)”).
With some tapes, noise may still appear — particularly if the tape was recorded on
a different VCR. In this case, manual tracking adjustment is also possible.
Normal mode level indication
Fine mode level indication
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
dB
OVER
dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
0
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
–10
–10
–10
–10
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
1. Set menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF (0)”.
●
In the Auto Tracking
mode, the [METER
MODE TRACKING]
button lights.
2. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter for tracking.
Press the right [TRACKING METER MODE] button.
[ The [METER MODE TRACKING] button blinks when the meter is switched to
Tracking mode.
• The reference output level shown by the audio level meter is -20 dBFS or
-18 dBFS.
Ⅲ Adjust with the master and balance controls.
The CH1 and CH2 [PLAY] volume controls, and the CH3 and CH4 [PLAY]
volume controls work as one set.
3. Adjust until the tracking meter level reaches the maximum.
The CH1 and CH3 [PLAY] volume controls serve as master volume control and
the CH2 and CH4 volume controls as balance control.
• Turn the CH1 or CH3 [PLAY] volume control.
The Auto Tracking mode can be restored by setting menu switch No. 005 <AUTO
TRACKING> to “ON (1)”.
The audio on CH2 or CH4 changes along with CH1 or CH3.
• Turn the CH2 or CH4 [PLAY] volume control to adjust the balance between
CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4.
Pair
Pair
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PLAY
Balance control
Master volume control
Balance control
Master volume control
78
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
8 PLAYBACK
8-7 SIMPLIFIED PLAYBACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
8-5 ERROR CORRECTION
The playback speed can be increased or decreased in two ways (simplified playback speed adjustment function).
When two VCRs are being played back, this function helps synchronize playback operation (sync operation).
Error correction of digital playback signals is performed with the error correction
circuit and the error conceal circuit.
[IN] button
[OUT] button
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
Error correction circuit : Errors in playback data caused by dropouts or mis-
tracking are corrected using the results of the data
operation.
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
INPUT
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
[PLAYER] button
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
Error conceal circuit
: Major errors that the error correction circuit cannot
correct are concealed with the previous frame data.
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525 CONDITION
625
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
[RECORDER] button
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
TC
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
Jog dial
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
Switching the setting of menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> turns the error
correction circuit ON/OFF.
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
The relationship between the menu setting and error correction operation is shown
in the table below.
[REW]
button
[ENTRY] button
[PREVIEW] button button
[PLAY]
[FF]
button
Menu setting
NORMAL
Error correction circuit
Error conceal circuit
o
o
x
o
x
x
Increasing/decreasing the playback speed
by 7%
NO CONCEAL
NO CORRECTION
Synchronized Running mode
1. During playback, press the [FF] or [REW] button
while pressing the [PLAY] button.
The tapes loaded on two VCRs can be played back in
sync with the same time code data.
Ⅲ Connection
• Connect the [REMOTE IN] connector of the
controlled VCR and the [REMOTE OUT]
connector of the control VCR with a 9-pin cable.
• Input external sync signals to synchronize the
two VCRs.
o
x
: Activated
: Deactivated
Ⅲ
While the [FF] button is pressed: The playback
speed is increased by about 7%.
• Normally set to “NORMAL (0)”.
Ⅲ
While the [REW] button is pressed: The
playback speed is decreased by about 7%.
• Turning part or all of the error correct circuit OFF allows you to compare noise
levels and check the head service life. For comparison, play back a moving
picture.
For example, when switching between “NORMAL” and “NO CONCEAL” shows a
big difference in picture quality, it indicates that the error conceal circuit works
and that a major error has occurred. In this case, the heads may no longer be
serviceable and should be replaced.
2. Operation differs depending on which button you
release first.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
If you release the [PLAY] button first, playback
speed increased/decreased by about 7% is
maintained (Latch mode).
• To return to the normal speed, press the [PLAY]
button again.
If you release the [FF] or [REW] button first, the
normal playback mode is restored.
Ⅲ Setting
•
Set the Remote/Local switch to “Remote” on the
controlled VCR and set the Remote/Local switch
to “Local” on the control VCR.
Ⅲ Operation
1. Set menu switch No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP
MODE> to “ENABLE”.
8-6. AUDIO V. FADE FUNCTION
2. Press the [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons
at the same time. Both buttons light up.
3. If the edit mode (assemble, insert) is selected,
release it.
Major changes in waveforms during audio transitions may be heard as noise during playback.
To reduce this noise, an Audio V. Fade function is provided. When this is operating, audio transitions are detected
and the audio level is faded in a V shape during playback.
4. Search the position from which you want to start
This function can be set with menu switch No. 214 <PBV. FADE>.
OFF (0) :The V. fade function is disabled.
5M (1) :The V. fade function is enabled and audio transitions are faded out and faded in for 5 msec to reduce
noise. For best results, this position is recommended.
10M (2) :The V. fade function is enabled and audio transitions are faded out and faded in for 10 msec to reduce
noise.
playback using the control VCR’s jog dial, etc.
5. Press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [IN]
button to determine the edit IN point for
synchronized playback.
[ The time code data determined by the control
VCR is registered as the playback start point
on the two VCRs.
6. Press the [PREVIEW] button to start the
synchronized tape running.
The phase is adjusted just before the edit IN
point for synchronization.
80
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
8 PLAYBACK
8-9 VARIABLE SLOW PLAYBACK
8-8 SHUTTLE SEARCH/JOG OPERATION
Noiseless variable slow playback from -1.0x to +1.0x is available. Triple-pair playback heads assure optimum
picture quality.
[SEARCH] button
[VAR/P.PLAY] button
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
L
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
Notes
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
OFF
O
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
● Selecting modes in which
Shuttle Search can be
engaged.
Variable Motion
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
Variable Motion
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH4/TRACKING
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
P.PLAY
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
STILL
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
–2
–2
–2
–2
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
UB
H
M
S
F
+4
+4
+4
+4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
–60
–60
–60
–60
MENU
REC
SET
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
0
0
0
0
X1
–20
–20
–20
–20
X-1
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
H
M
S
F
With menu switch No. 301
<DIRECT SEARCH>
set to “OFF (0)”, Shuttle
Search starts only when
the [SEARCH] button is
pressed.
TRACKING
PHONES
REC
–4
–4
–4
–4
INSERT
–60
–60
–60
–60
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
X1
X-1
Search dial
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
INSERT
AUTO EDIT
IN
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
Search dial
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
PREVIEW
REVIEW
AUTO EDIT
PREROLL
USER
CANCEL
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Jog dial
When set to “ON (0)”,
Search can start from any
mode except REC and
REC Pause mode.
Rapid visual search can be performed with either of two concentric dials; the outer
one serving as a shuttle search dial and the inner one as a jog dial.
● Audio recorded on the tape’s longitudinal cue track or digital audio track is output
during shuttle search and jog operation. (Select the audio during search with
menu switch No. 216 <AUD SEL. AT SEARCH>.)
Variable slow playback can be executed using either of the two methods described
below.
Method 1
● Maximum Search speed
1. Press the [VAR/P. PLAY] button to engage the Variable mode. The button
lights.
X32, X17 or X6 speed can
be selected with menu
switch No. 340 <SEARCH
SPEED>.
Shuttle search control
2. Turn the search dial.
1. Turn the outer dial in the Play/Still/Stop/FF/REW modes.
Turn the dial to FWD (clockwise) to search in the forward direction and to REV
(counterclockwise) to search in the reverse direction.
Variable slow playback from -1 x to +1x is available.
• Turning the search dial all the way in the REV direction gives you -1x speed.
Turning it all the way in the FWD direction gives you +1x speed.
When the search dial is set to “STILL”, a still picture is displayed.
• The variable slow playback speed is shown on screen.
● Use menu switch No. 221
<SEARCH PB AT 1+3/
2+4> to select whether or
not audio is recorded on
the cue track when menu
switch No. 219 <SEARCH
REC CH> is set to CH1+3/
CH2+4.
[ Search starts. Search speed changes as given below in both forward and
reverse directions depending on how far the dial is turned.
Center (STILL) 0[0.03[0.07[0.10[0.20[0.50[ 1.00 [2[4[ 6[
10 [ X32
3. To stop variable slow playback
Press the operation button such as the [PLAY], [STOP], [PAUSE/STILL] and
[SEARCH] buttons.
The maximum search speed can be selected with the menu switch No. 340
<SEARCH SPEED>.
● Slow Picture mode
With menu switch No. 119
<SLOW PICTURE>
● The Still mode is engaged when the dial is set at the center still click position.
Play speed is X1 (normal) at the first click position in both forward and reverse
directions. Noiseless playback is available from about -1.0x to +1.0x.
In this case, the audio signals on the digital truck of tape are output.
Cautions
● The V. fade function is enabled only in the Playback, Program Playback or
Variable Slow Playback +1x mode. Under the following conditions, the V. fade
function may also be disabled in the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode.
1. In the first15 seconds after the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode is
activated.
FRAME (0): Slow-motion
frame play-
back
FIELD (1): Slow-motion
field playback
2. To stop search operation
Press PLAY, STOP, FF, or REW depending on which mode is to be engaged
next.
[ The selected mode is engaged. There is no change in the dial position.
When the [SEARCH] button is pressed, search operation starts at the speed
corresponding to the current position of the dial.
2. When playing a tape recorded on the BR-D40/DY-70 or some BR-D80/
D85s.
● When playback speed is changed from + to – and vice versa, gray lines may
appear at the top or bottom of the screen (except with normal D9-format video
signals). This is normal. It is not a malfunction.
● Noise may appear when the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode is activated.
This is normal. It is not a malfunction.
Jog operation
1. Turn the inner jog dial.
● Turn the dial in the FWD direction (clockwise) to advance the tape.
Turn the dial in the REV direction (counterclockwise) to reverse the tape.
Search speed corresponds to the speed with which the dial is turned.
● The Still mode is engaged whenever you stop turning the dial.
82
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 PLAYBACK
8 PLAYBACK
8-9 VARIABLE SLOW PLAYBACK
8-10 PROGRAM PLAYBACK
[PLAY] button
[PLAY] button
[VAR/P.PLAY] button
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
ON
I
LINE
CPN
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
L
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
OFF
O
Variable Motion
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER
RESET
VCON
REMOTE
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
+4
+4
+4
+4
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
+2
+2
+2
+2
MENU
SET
HOLD
P.PLAY
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
0
0
0
0
STILL
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–2
–2
–2
–2
H
M
S
F
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
–60
–60
–60
–60
PAUSE/STILL
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
REC
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
REC
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
Search dial
Jog dial
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
AUTO EDIT
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
[SHIFT] button
Jog dial
Method 2
The program playback function lets you vary tape playback speeds between +0.90x
and +1.1x.
Program playback is possible after setting the initial speed value. During program
playback, the playback speed can be varied.
Variable slow playback can be engaged during normal playback.
●When variable-motion
playback is performed at
speeds outside the
range from -1.0 x to +1.0
x, “!” appears with the
operation mode display
on-screen. This
1. To use this function, be sure to set the direct search function to OFF.
• Set menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> to “OFF (0)”.
Ⅲ
Engage the Stop or Still mode.
1. Engage the Program Playback mode.
While holding the [SHIFT] button down, press the [VAR/P. PLAY] button.
Counter display
2. Press the [PLAY] button to engage the Play mode.
3. When you want to start variable slow playback, hold the [PLAY] button down
and turn the search dial.
• The [VAR/P. PLAY] button blinks and the Program Playback mode is
engaged.
H
M
S
F
produces a distorted
picture.
The variable slow playback is executed in the range of +0.90x to +1.10x
according to the turning direction and angle of the search dial.
2. Set the program playback speed.
While pressing the [VAR/P. PLAY] button, turn the jog dial.
●Audio quality differs
depending on the setting
of menu switch No. 261
<AUD SEL. AT
SEARCH>. When
“DIGITAL AUDIO” is
selected, audio will be
distorted.
• Turning the search dial all the way in the REV direction gives you +0.90x
speed. Turning it all the way in the FWD direction gives you +1.10x speed.
• Turn the jog dial to set the playback speed in the range of +0.90x to +1.1x.
(0.1% step).
Turn the jog dial clockwise to accelerate the playback speed and
counterclockwise to decelerate it.
When the search dial is set to “STILL”, the Normal Playback mode (x1.0) is
engaged.
• Turning the search dial varies the playback speed in 1% steps. The variable
slow playback speed is shown on screen.
• The program playback speed is shown on the counter.
PLAY +1.042
TCR 00:00:00:01
3. Execute program playback.
While holding the [VAR/P. PLAY] button down, press the [PLAY] button.
4. Release the [PLAY] button to restore the normal playback mode.
• Playback continues at the set speed.
During program playback, the [PLAY] and [VAR/P. PLAY] buttons blink.
Method 3
4. To change the playback speed during program playback, hold the [VAR/P.
PLAY] button down and turn the jog dial.
Turn the jog dial while pressing the [PLAY] button during playback to increase or
decrease the playback speed according to the jog dial’s rotation direction and
speed.
5. To stop program playback, press any operation button, i.e. [STOP], [PLAY],
[PAUSE/STILL] and [SEARCH] buttons.
• Set menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> to “ON”.
Ⅲ
●
To increase playback speed
Turn the jog dial clockwise (in the FWD direction) while pressing the [PLAY]
button. The playback speed can be increased up to 2 times normal depending
on how fast you rotate the dial.
●
When you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback speed is restored.
Ⅲ
●
To decrease playback speed
Turn the jog dial counterclockwise (in the REV direction) while pressing the
[PLAY] button. The playback speed can be decreased until the tape stops
depending on how fast you rotate the dial.
●
When you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback speed is restored.
84
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
8 PLAYBACK
2 extra lines for color signals and 4 extra lines for black and white signals are provided for each frame. A data
added to the V blanking section of input signals is recorded on the tape as an extra line. In the Play mode, this
extra line information is added to the video signal for output.
8-11 FF, REW AND COUNTER MEMORY FUNCTIONS
[SET] button
9-1 EXTRA LINE DATA RECORDING/PLAYBACK
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Extra line recording
Variable Motion
● Menu switch indication for
extra line
NTSC: (525) is displayed
after the menu
switch name.
PAL : p is displayed after
the menu switch
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
Select the line containing the information to be recorded on an extra line.
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
T
O
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
1. Setting the input signal line for extra-line recording
Select with menu switch No. 138 <EXTRA LINE REC>.
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
FIX (0)
NTSC: Records line 22 information in the input
signal onto extra line-1 and line 284
information onto extra line-2. Factory
setting.
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
number and (625) is
displayed after the
menu switch name.
[PREROLL] [REW] [FF]
button button button
PAL :Records line 22 information in input signals
onto extra line-1 and line 623 information
onto extra line-2. Factory setting.
Notes
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
To fast-forward or rewind the tape
● For details of menu
switches No. 138 to No.
142, refer to page 47.
Output mode selection in FF
and REW modes
Press the [FF] or [REW] button.
[ The [FF] or [REW] button lights and the tape is fast-forwarded or rewound.
Maximum FF and REW speeds can be set to 60 times, 32 times or 17 times
normal with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW MAX SPEED>. Factory setting:
60 times normal
USER SETTING
(1)
Two user-specified lines in the input signal are
recorded onto extra line-1 and 2 for color signal
data. Four user-specified lines in the input signal
are recorded onto the extra line-1 to 4 for black-
and-white data.
With menu switch No. 314
<PB/EE MODE> set to
“STOP/FF/REW (0)”, press
the [PB/EE] button to engage
the Still Output mode or EE
mode.
Counter memory function
Setting procedure
To specify the lines for color signals, set menu
switches No. 139 and No. 140. For black-and-white
signals, set menu switches No. 139 to No. 142.
●Set the counter mode to “CTL” with the front panel [COUNTER] button.
Counter memory operation
Auto REW function setting
With menu switch No. 312
<AUTO REW>
1. Specify a tape section to be recalled.
Press the [RESET] button while pressing the [SET] button at the desired
section.
[ The counter is reset to “0:00:00:00” and this section is entered in this unit.
* When the counter display mode is set to “TC”, the value at the specified
point is entered.
• Press the [SET] button to check the entered value on the counter display.
2. Start Counter Search.
In the Stop mode, press the [PREROLL] button while pressing the [SET]
button.
The tape fast-forwards or rewinds and stops automatically at or near counter
0:00:00:00 in CTL mode.
The tape is automatically
rewound to the start when it
comes to an end in the Play
or Record mode.
2. Selecting an input signal line when USER SETTING (1) is selected in
Step 1.
● Set the line to record on extra line-1 with menu switch No. 139 <EXTRA-L R1
SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).
● Set the line to record on extra line-2 with menu switch No. 140 <EXTRA-L R2
SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).
● Set the line to record on extra line-3 with menu switch No. 141 <EXTRA-L R3
SEL> (black-and-white signal only).
● Set the line to record on extra line-4 with menu switch No. 142 <EXTRA-L R4
SEL> (black-and-white signal only).
In time code mode, the tape stops automatically at or near the entered value.
8-12 REPEAT PLAYBACK
With this function activated, tape playback is automatically repeated when the tape
ends.
Setting
● Set menu switch No. 311 <AUTO PLAY> to “ON (1)”
● Set menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> to “ON (1)”
Ⅲ
Start playback
When the tape ends, it is rewound to the start and automatically begins
playback. This procedure is repeated continuously.
86
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9-1 EXTRA LINE DATA RECORDING/PLAYBACK
9-2 EXTRA LINE, VITC LINE, V. BLANK MASK and PB EXTENSION LINE settings
Setting range and priorities for the following menu switches are shown below.
No. 138 to 147 EXTRA LINE, No. 601 V. BLANK MASK, No. 400 to 401 VITC LINE SELECT and No. 128 PB
EXTENSION LINE.
Extra line data playback
● Menu switch indication for
extra line
NTSC: (525) is displayed
after the menu
switch name.
PAL : p is displayed after
the menu switch
The menu switches below are used to select whether or not the extra line information
should be added to the video signal during playback, and if so, how it should be
added.
Ⅵ NTSC
1. Select how the extra line information is to be added to the playback video
signal with menu switch No. 143 <EXTRA LINE PB>.
523 524 525
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
[525] LINE No.
SYNC
number and (625) is
displayed after the
menu switch name.
VITC SETTING RANGE
High
Priority
Low
MUTING (0)
AUTO (1)
Extra line information is not added to output video
signals. Factory setting.
EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE
V. BLANK MASK ON
V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H
● For details of menu
switches No. 143 to No.
147, refer to page 47–48.
● When menu switch No. 128
<PB EXTENSION LINE> is
set to “ON”, the extra line
information in the video
signal line is not output.
V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE
EXTENSION SETTING LINE
When video signals are output, extra line
information is added to the line selected for extra
line recording.
USER SETTING
(3)
When video signals are output, extra line
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290
[525] LINE No.
information is added to the two user-specified lines.
Color signal data is output on two lines and black-
and-white signal data is output on four lines.
SYNC
High
VITC SETTING RANGE
EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE
To specify the lines for color signals, set menu
switches No. 144 and No. 145. For black-and-white
signals, specify the lines with menu switches No.
144 to No. 147.
Priority
Low
V. BLANK MASK ON
V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE
EXTENSION SETTING LINE
V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H
Analog output signal is masked.
2. Select a line on which extra line information should be added to the
playback video signal when USER SETTING (3) is selected in Step 1.
Notes on the extra line
user setting
Ⅵ PAL
● Extra line information is not
output if the selected lines
are the same as those set
with menu switch No. 400
and No. 401.
● Set the line for extra line-1 information with menu switch No. 144 <EXTRA-L
P1 SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).
620 621 622 623 624 625
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
[625] LINE No.
● Set the line for extra line-2 information with menu switch No. 145 <EXTRA-L
P2 SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).
SYNC
VITC SETTING RANGE
High
Priority
Low
● Set the line for extra line-3 information with menu switch No. 146 <EXTRA-L
P3 SEL> (black-and-white signal only).
EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE
V. BLANK MASK ON
● Set the line for extra line-4 information with menu switch No. 147 <EXTRA-L
P4 SEL> (black-and-white signal only).
V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE
EXTENSION SETTING LINE
V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H
Analog output signal is masked.
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337
[625] LINE No.
SYNC
VITC SETTING RANGE
High
Priority
Low
EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE
V. BLANK MASK ON
V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H
V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE
EXTENSION SETTING LINE
88
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9-4 FIXED TIME CUE UP FUNCTION
9-3 SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION
More than one BR-D95U can be operated at the same time with one RS-422 serial remote controller.
9-pin remote connector
The tape can be cued to the position whose time data (fixed time) is recorded with “00F: FIXED TIME ENTRY” on
the top menu page (fixed time cue up function). Useful to cue up the tape to a specified position.
[SET] button
[COUNTER] button
[HOLD] button
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
RS-422 serial remote controller
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
L
9-pin remote cable
REMOTE IN
A
N
A
L
O
G
CPN
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
[SEARCH] button
REMOTE IN
Second VCR
Last VCR
First VCR
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
V
0
0
0
0
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
VI
VI
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
SERIAL
V
/
A
OUT
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
COMPOSITE
LINE IN
–2
–2
–2
–2
IN
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
IN
H
M
S
F
IN
RS-232C
1
RS-232C
–4
–4
–4
–4
RS-232C
1
1
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
Y
Y
INSERT
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
Y
Y
IN
OUT
2
REMOTE IN (9P)
REMOTE OUT (9P)
VIDEO CONTROL
Y
Y
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
R-Y
R-Y
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AES
/
EBU
AES
/
EBU
R-Y
R-Y
AUTO EDIT
AES EBU
/
R-Y
B-Y
R-Y
-
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
IN
CH1/2
OUT
IN
CH1/2
OUT
IN
CH1/2
OUT
CH1/2
CH1/2
CH1/2
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
B-Y
SHIFT
B-Y
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
FWD
REV
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
CH3/4
IN
COM
IN
CO
IN
COM
[SHIFT] button
[PREROLL] button
Jog dial
Registering the fixed time data
● In the Fixed Time Register-
ing mode, press the
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE OUT
Connection
[RESET] button to reset to
“00:00:00:00”.
1. Press the [MENU] button to display the menu setting screen.
2. Turn the jog dial to select the top menu “00F: FIXED TIME ENTRY”.
• The time data currently registered is shown on screen.
00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT
Connect the 9-pin remote connector of the RS-422 serial remote controller to the
first VCR’s [REMOTE IN] connector.
Connect the first VCR’s [REMOTE OUT] connector to the second VCR’s
[REMOTE IN] connector with a 9-pin remote cable, the second VCR’s [REMOTE
OUT] connector to the third [REMOTE IN] connector, and so on.
00F:FIXED TIME ENTRY
00:00:00:00
● 00A: MENU in the top
menu
Even though INITIAL is
selected for SETTING,
registered data is not reset.
Time data
Setting
3. Press the [HOLD] button.
Set the all connected VCRs as follows.
[ The Fixed Time Data Registering mode is engaged and the time data
currently registered is shown on the counter display.
The uppermost digit blinks.
• Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON (1)”.
• Press the front panel [REMOTE] button to engage the VCR in the Remote mode
(the “REMOTE” indicator lights on the display).
With a remote controller
that requires the VCR to
reply to commands, set
menu switch No. 369
<PARA RUN> to “OFF”
for the first VCR, and
“ON” for the second and
subsequent VCRs.
*The recorder's variable
playback speed is -1.0x
to +1.0x. The player’s
variable playback speed
is -2.0x to +3.0x.
Operation
* The time data does not blink on screen.
Register the time data on the counter display.
● Checking the registered
time data
• Recording, playback, fast-forward and rewind on all the VCRs can be controlled
at the same time with the RS-422 serial remote controller.
4. Turn the jog dial to select the digit.
The registered time data
can be checked on screen
by displaying “00F: FIXED
TIME ENTRY”. Press the
[HOLD] button to display
the registered time data on
the counter display.
The selected digit blinks.
Simultaneous operation with the BR-D95U
When the BR-D95U is used instead of the RS-422 serial remote controller, set as
follows.
5. Set the time data by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the value for each digit.
Ⅲ BR-D95U used for simultaneous operation (first VCR)
•
If you want to operate the first VCR at the same time, set menu switch No. 369
<PARA-RUN> on the first VCR to “ON (1)”. If not, set to “OFF (0)”
Set the operation mode to “Local”. Press the [REMOTE] button so that the
“REMOTE” indicator on the display goes out.
•
7. When setting is complete, press the [SET] button.
“SET” is shown on the counter display.
The set time data is registered and the normal screen is restored.
Ⅲ Second VCR
•
•
Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “OFF (0)”.
Set the operation mode to “Remote”.
Ⅲ Third and subsequent VCRs
Fixed time cue up operation
•
•
Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON (1)”.
Set the operation mode to “Remote”.
1. Load a recorded tape.
Operation
2. Select the counter display mode with the [COUNTER] button.
• “TC” or “UB”: The tape is cued up according to the time code registered on the
tape.
• “CTL”: The tape is cued up according to the time data shown on the CTL
counter.
When the [PLAYER] button is pressed...
•
If menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> on the first VCR is set to “OFF (0)”;
The [PLAYER] button is illuminated.
If menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> on the first VCR is set to “ON (1)”;
The [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons are illuminated.
[
•
[
3. Press the [PREROLL] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.
The tape is cued up to the registered position.
Any operation executed on the first VCR will automatically be executed on all the other
VCRs as well.
90
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9-5 MULTI CUE-UP FUNCTION
9-5 MULTI CUE-UP FUNCTION
In the Multi Cue-Up mode, up to 8 cue points can be specified and cued up. To engage the Multi Cue-Up mode,
set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “ON”.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
[ASSEM] button
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
UB
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
–4
–4
–4
–4
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
–60
–60
–60
–60
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
0
0
0
0
UB
X1
+4
+4
+4
+4
X-1
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
CH2
CH3
+2
+2
+2
+2
CH1
CH4
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
INSERT
STILL
ENTRY
TC
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
X1
X-1
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
PULL
RELEASE
INSERT
PULL
RELEASE
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
[PREROLL] button
[ENTRY] button
[CANCEL] button
8
6
7
[ENTRY] button
● When power is turned off,
all specified cue points are
cancelled.
ⅢTo change the specified cue point
1. Engage the Multi Cue-Up mode.
• Set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “ON”. The [ASSEM] button
●In the Multi Cue-Up
Display the image at the cue point you want to change and press the [ENTRY]
button while holding down the corresponding cue point button.
(e.g.) To change the fourth cue point
• Locate the cue point you want to change and press the [ENTRY] button while
holding down the [DA3] button.
mode, recording and
editing operations are
disabled.
blinks and the Multi Cue-Up mode is engaged.
● If the Multi Cue mode is
engaged again before the
power is turned off, the last
cue point specified before
the Multi Cue mode was
previously disengaged can
still be used.
2. Set the Counter mode to “TC” with the [COUNTER] button.
3. Play back the tape. Pause the tape at the scene you want to specify as the
cue point.
ⅢTo erase the specified cue point
While holding down the button corresponding to the cue point you want to
erase, press the [CANCEL] button.
4. Specify the cue point.
• Press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [VIDEO] button. The first cue
point is specified and the [VIDEO] button lights.
• To specify the second cue point, press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the
[DA1] button.
• Up to 8 cue points can be specified with the button operation shown in the
table below.
The corresponding button goes out and the cue point is erased.
(e.g.) To erase the 6th cue point
• While holding down the [TC] button, press the [CANCEL] button. The [TC]
button goes out and the 6th cue point is erased.
5. Perform the Cue-Up operation
Hold down the button corresponding to the required Cue-Up point and press the
[PREROLL] button.
(e.g.) To Cue-Up the third cue point
• Hold down the [DA2] button and press the [PREROLL] button. The third cue
point is cued up and the corresponding still picture is displayed.
Cue
point
Operation buttons Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VIDEO + ENTRY
DA1 + ENTRY
DA2 + ENTRY
DA3 + ENTRY
DA4 + ENTRY
TC + ENTRY
IN + ENTRY
The [VIDEO] button lights.
The [DA1] button lights.
The [DA2] button lights.
The [DA3] button lights.
The [DA4] button lights.
The [TC] button lights.
The [IN] button lights.
The [OUT] button lights.
6. Quit the Multi Cue mode.
Set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “OFF”.
The [ASSEM] button goes out and the normal mode is engaged.
OUT + ENTRY
ⅢTo check specified cue points
Press each button for which a cue point is specified. The time of the specified
cue point is displayed on the counter display.
(e.g.) To check the third cue point, press the [DA2] button.
92
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS
9-6 STRIPING REC Function
9-6 STRIPING REC Function
Menu setting details
When preparing a tape for editing, you can use this function to record the video signals, time code and user bits
set with the <STRIPING REC MENU> on the entire tape.
On screen
VID. SOURCE Video BLACK
Counter
Settings
BLACK
SIF
LINE
CPN
Contents
Selects the video signals to be recorded. If non-
input signals are selected, the indication blinks.
BLACK:Selects the built-in black signal. The built-in
color bar signal cannot be selected.
<STRIPING REC MENU>
V I D.SOURCE
AUD.SOURCE
TCG PRESET
UBG PRESET
BLACK
(MUTING)
00:58:00:00
00 00 00 00
SIF
:Selects the AES/EBU signals. This cannot
be selected if the SA-D95U is not installed.
REC INH
LINE :Selects composite signals.
CPN :Selects component signals.
Muting is always on. Setting is not possible.
Presets the time code.
START
EXIT
REC+PLAY
STOP
AUD. SOURCE
TCG PRESET 00:58:00:00
UBG PRESET 00 00 00 00
(MUTING)
Desired value
Desired value (0 - F) Presets the user bits.
Operation
1. If the [RECORDER] or [PLAYER] button is illuminated, press the button so
that it goes off.
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
2. Press the [REMOTE] button to select the “LOCAL” mode for local
operation.
3. Press the [REC] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button to open the
<STRIPING REC MENU>.
[ The current settings are displayed on screen and the counter display.
●The [REC] button blinks.
●The Stop mode is engaged if the tape is running.
4. Load a cassette tape.
[ When the [REC] switch on the cassette is set to “OFF”, “REC INH” blinks on
H
M
S
F
Setting
●
●
After this operation, all
buttons except for
[EJECT], [STOP] and
[REC] buttons have no
effect.
1. Open the <STRIPING REC MENU>.
Press the [REC] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button.
2.Turn the jog dial to select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting.
●VID. SOURCE: Selecting the video signals
While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to select the signal.
●TCG PRESET: Setting the time code
1. Press the [HOLD] button.
[ The digit for the time code blinks.
2. Select the digit with the jog dial.
[ The selected digit blinks.
3. While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to change the
numeric value.
●To cancel the setting, press the [HOLD] button.
[ The menu item selection menu is restored.
●To set all digits to 0, press the [RESET] button.
4. Press the [SET] button to register the setting.
●UBG PRESET: Setting the user bits
1. Press the [HOLD] button.
[ The digit for user bits blinks.
2. Select the digit with the jog dial.
[ The selected digit blinks.
Non-drop frame/drop
frame indication (NTSC
only)
Set with the menu
switch No. 416.
Drop frame:
00:00:00•00
Non-drop frame:
00:00:00:00
When the [STOP] button
is pressed in this step,
the menu is closed and
the STRIPING REC
mode is released.
screen.
5. Change the settings if required.
●Refer to the menu setting contents and procedures on page 95. The settings
are retained even if the power is turned off.
6. Press the [PLAY] button while holding down the [REC] button to start
STRIPING REC.
[ The tape is rewound automatically to the beginning and recording starts.
●During rewind, the [REC] and [REW] buttons blink alternately.
●When recording starts, the blinking “STRIPING” indication lights. The
[PLAY] and [REC] buttons blink simultaneously.
●When the end of the tape is reached, “Complete” is shown on the counter
display, the tape is automatically rewound to the beginning and STRIPING
REC ends.
●The following settings which are automatically set with the STRIPING REC
are reset to the original settings when STRIPING REC is complete.
• VIDEO INPUT] button
●
●
Audio signals are not
recorded.
●
Dropped data cannot be
set in the Drop Frame
mode. Data has 2
frames which are added
(in the Drop Frame
mode).
Editing operations such
as assembly and insert
cannot be executed. If
an operation other than
the current mode is
executed, for example
when the [PLAY] button
is pressed during rewind,
STRIPING REC ends.
3. While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to change the
numeric value.
• [COUNTER] button
• TIME CODE] (INT/EXT, REC/FREE, PRESET/REGEN) switches
• Menu switch No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>
• If menu switch No. 457 <UB AUTO PRESET> is set to “ON”, the registered
user bit data is restored.
●
When another operation
is performed during
recording ([REC] +
[PLAY]), STRIPING REC
ends.
●To cancel the setting, press the [HOLD] button.
[The menu item selection menu is restored.
●To set all digits to 0, press the [RESET] button.
4. Press the [SET] button to register the setting.
4. End menu setting.
• Audio muting is released.
7. Press the button on the front panel as required so that the “Complete”
indication goes out.
It is not necessary to end menu setting to start STRIPING REC right away.
Press the [STOP] button to close the menu and restore normal operation.
94
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
Time codes and user bits can be recorded and played back as time data.
The time code area on the tape is divided into the main time code sector used for time data for editing and the sub
time code sector which can be used for optional recording of time code.
10-2 TIME CODE INITIAL SETTING (PRESET)
The BR-D95U includes a built-in time code generator so that initial values can be set as desired for the time code
and user bits.
User bit data is stored in the built-in nonvolatile memory and retained even when the power is turned off. The
stored data can be preferentially recorded on the tape for editing (UB auto preset function).
10-1 TIME CODE DISPLAY
Notes
To display selected time data on the counter display and the on-screen display
during playback or recording.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
● On-screen display data are
output through the rear
panel [LINE2-SUPER]
connector.
(When the [ON SCREEN]
switch on the sub panel is
set to ON.)
● The on-screen display
position can be moved with
menu switches No. 501
and 502.
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
● Drop Frame/Non-Drop
Frame mode (NTSC only)
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
[TC] indicator
[UB] indicator
OFF
O
Variable Motion
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
In the NTSC system, the
actual number of frames
per second is approxi-
mately 29.97. However,
the number of frames used
by the time code process-
ing standard is 30. To
compensate for this
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
TIME CDOE
Variable Motion
DF
INT FREE PRESET
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
NDF EXT REC REGEN
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
RF
HID
GND
OFF
8
ON
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
SERVICE USE ONLY
ON
CF
4
OFF
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
P.PLAY
(625) ON SCREEN
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
TIME CDOE
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
PRESET
REGEN
DF
INT FREE
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
Front sub panel
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
NDF EXT REC
difference, the Drop Frame
mode drops the 00 frame
and the 01 frame once
every minute (except the
tenth minute). In the Non-
Drop Frame mode, no
frames are dropped and
the difference between
actual tape time and the
time code is ignored.
[SHIFT] button
[COUNTER] button
Setting
Ⅲ
Set the COUNTER switch to TC or UB.
●
Time code reader data
display during slow play of
1.0 times normal or
slower
1st field or 2nd field is
shown.
Front sub panel switches for time code setting
• Set the counter to the Time Code Display mode with the [COUNTER] button.
• Press the [COUNTER] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to set the
counter to the User Bits Display mode.
● Set the [PRESET/REGEN] switch to “PRESET”.
● Set the [REC/FREE] switch as desired.
REC: Time code preset in the time code generator runs in the Record mode.
FREE: Time code runs from the preset point in the time code generator.
● Set the [INT/EXT] switch to “INT”.
“TC” or “UB” is shown on the display depending on the setting.
● In the Drop Frame mode,
the front panel [DF]
indicator lights.
TC: Displays time code data.
UB: Displays user bits.
TC1: 1st field
TC2: 2nd field
● Set the [DF/NDF] switch as desired. (NTSC only):
DROP (0)
:Sets the Running mode of the built-in time code generator to
the Drop Frame mode.
TC UB
CONDITION
NON DROP (1) :Sets the Running mode of the built-in time code generator to
the NON Drop Frame mode.
User bits
H
M
S
F
User bits are provided to
allow user-specified data to
be included in the time code
data. User bits are recorded
and played back with the
time code.
User user bits can be preset,
recorded, played back, and
displayed.
Hour
Second
Frame
Minute
Front panel setting
TCR : Time code reader data (see the
left column)
● Select the Counter Display mode to TC or UB.
Menu switch setting
TCR 00:00:00:00
TCG : Time code generator data
UBR : User bits reader data
UBG : User bits generator data
TCR • : CTL (control) signal interpo-
lation mark
:....Non-drop
.....Drop frame
● Menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> setting
Time code mode display
•
The user bits set for each
VCR can be recorded at all
times (UB PRESET AUTO).
When user bit data is preset from the 9-pin remote controller, set this to “OFF”.
When this is set to “ON”, user bit preset data from the 9-pin remote controller is
ignored.
• However, you cannot set
sub time code user bits.
Sub time code data display
Sub time code, marked with “SUB”, is
displayed with the main time code on the
on-screen display.
● Sub time code is shown when:
• Sub time code is output through the
VITC output (with menu switch No. 504
<INFORMATION SELECT> set to
“TIME+SUB TC (3)” or “TIME+SUB
TC+MODE (4)”).
SUB TCR 00:00:00:00
TCR 00:00:00:00
SUB: Sub time code
96
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10-2 TIME CODE INITIAL SETTING (PRESET)
10-3 TIME CODE RECORDING
There are two different ways of recording time code or user bits; recording the data output from the built-in time
code generator and recording externally generated time code or user bits.
[SET] button
[HOLD] button
The user bit auto preset function allows preferential recording of data stored in the built-in nonvolatile memory.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
Recording time code data output from the built-in time code generator
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
[SEARCH] button
Jog dial
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
+2
+2
+2
+2
POWER
P.PLAY
AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
–4
–4
–4
–4
LINE
CPN
L
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
X1
X-1
R
OFF
O
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
Variable Motion
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
TIME CDOE
DF
INT FREE PRESET
[REC] button
[STOP] button
NDF EXT REC REGEN
OFF
8
ON
RF
HID
GND
SERVICE USE ONLY
ON
CF
4
OFF
(625) OSCREEN
TIME CDOE
PRESET
REGEN
DF
INT FREE
Notes
Procedure
Front sub panel
● To cancel a setting, press
the [HOLD] button before
the [SET] button has been
pressed.
1. Engage the Time Code Generator Preset mode.
Press the [HOLD] button.
[ The first digit on the counter display blinks.
NDF EXT REC
Setting
H
H
H
M
M
M
S
S
S
F
F
F
2. Set the value for the blinking digit by turning
the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH]
button.
● In the preset mode (steps
1 to 4), press the [RESET]
button to set all digits to
“0”.
● Time code data starts
running as soon as
presetting is finished if the
front sub panel [FREE/
REC] switch is set to
“FREE”.
Front sub panel switch setting
Auto regeneration mode
during editing
Contents of
the time code
Switch setting
[ The value of the blinking digit changes. Use the
Use menu switch No.
410 <AUTO REGEN
MODE> to enable time
code regeneration during
editing even with the
[PRESET/REGEN]
[INT/EXT]
[REC/FREE]
[PRESET/REGEN]
“PRESET”
hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) for user bits.
Time code preset in the
built-in time code
generator is recorded.
3. Shift the digit by turning the jog dial.
[ The blinking digits shift to the next one.
“REC” or
“FREE”
“INT”
“INT”
4. Set desired values for all digits.
Repeat steps 2 - 3.
Recorded in sync
with the time code
recorded on the tape.
“REC” or
“FREE”
“REGEN”
switch set to “PRESET”.
5. Presetting is completed by pressing the [SET]
button.
[ The selected data are preset in the built-in time
code generator. When preset is finished, the
normal on-screen and counter displays are
restored.
H
M
S
F
●To copy VITC when
SDTI signals are input to
the BR-D95U, both the
[SERIAL] connectors
and [TIME CODE]
connectors must be
connected.
Menu switch setting
● Menu switch No. 403 <REGEN MODE>: Set as desired in the Regen mode.
● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC>
When set to OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code.
When set to ON (1): Input VITC is recorded in the sub time code.
Factory setting: ON (1)
H
M
S
F
The user bit data is stored in the built-in memory.
● Setting of menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO>
OFF (0): The user bit auto preset function is disabled. The user bit data from
the built-in time code generator is recorded.
ON (1): The user bit auto preset function is enabled. The user bit data stored
in the built-in memory is recorded.
Checking the values set in the time code
generator
Procedure
H
M
S
F
(Do this with the tape unloaded or in the Stop mode)
1. Press the [REC] button to show the value set in
the time code generator.
Procedure
To check the user bit data stored in the built-in
memory, set the counter display mode to “UB” and
menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> to
“ON (1)”.
2. Pressing the [STOP] button restores the
normal display mode.
1. Press the [REC] button in the Stop mode and check the value of the built-
in time code generator.
[ The data value stays on display when the [REC] button is pressed.
● Press the [STOP] button to restore the normal display mode.
2. Record the time code and user bits.
[ Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button.
● TCG or UBG is shown on the on-screen counter display.
3. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button.
98
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10-3 TIME CODE RECORDING
10-4 TIME CODE PLAYBACK
Recording the time code data output from the external time code generator
Time code is output through the rear panel [TC OUT] and [VIDEO OUT] connectors during playback. VITC time
code with the time code data superimposed on the video signal is output through the [VIDEO OUT-LINE] connector.
Sub time code is output through the [VIDEO OUT-LINE] connector as VITC time code when menu switch No. 451
<VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “SUB TC”. Only the main time code is output through the [TC OUT] connector.
Externally generated time code can be recorded after being regenerated with the
time code data output from the built-in time code generator.
[COUNTER] button
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
OFF
O
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
Variable Motion
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
HOLD
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
TIME CDOE
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
DF
INT FREE PRESET
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
NDF EXT REC REGEN
X-1
ON
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
RF
HID
GND
OFF
8
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
SERVICE USE ONLY
ON
CF
4
OFF
(625) OSCREEN
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
TIME CDOE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
PRESET
REGEN
DF
INT FREE
Front sub panel
[PLAY] button
NDF EXT REC
Notes
1. Front sub panel switch setting
Setting
1. Front panel switch setting
● Select a Counter Display mode to TC or UB with the [COUNTER] and [SHIFT]
buttons.
● Drop/Non-drop Frame
mode selection (NTSC
only)
● Select the External Time Code Generator mode by setting the [INT/EXT]
switch to “EXT”.
The [FREE/REC] and [PRESET/REGEN] switch settings are not necessary.
● Select the Counter Display or On-screen Display mode to TC or UB with the
[COUNTER] and [SHIFT] buttons.
● When you are using this
deck as a player, the
Automatically selected
according to the mode of
the received time code
(Drop Frame or Non-drop
Frame).
recording time code may
not be regenerated when
you output embedded
audio (SERIAL V/A OUT)
signals to the BR-D750U,
BR-D85U or BR-D80U. In
this case, set menu switch
No. 237 <EMBEDDED
AUDIO> to “OFF”.
2. Menu switch setting
2. Menu switch setting
● For VITC time code output, select a line to be added to the video signal.
● Select the external time code to be regenerated.
● Menu switch No. 400 <VITC LINE-1 SELECT>
(Initial setting: NTSC 16 LINE/PAL 19 LINE)
● Menu switch No. 401 <VITC LINE-2 SELECT>
(Initial setting: NTSC 18 LINE/PAL 21 LINE )
● Menu switch No. 409 <EXT REGEN TC> (Initial setting: LTC (0))
● Regeneration operation
•When time code is being
regenerated with input
time code, the built-in time
code generator stops
counting when no time
code is input.
● In the Play mode, time
code regeneration is based
on the playback time code
value.
● Inserting time code
If only time code data is
being inserted, record it on
the main time code. It is not
possible to insert it in the
sub time code.
LTC (0): Regenerates the LTC time code input through the rear panel
[TC IN] connector.
Input LTC time code should be regenerated (matched in
terms of sync and phase) with video signals. Make sure you
input an external sync signal to the feeding equipment.
● Select VITC time code output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector.
Menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT>
SUB TC (0)
TC (1)
OFF
:Outputs the VITC time code recorded in the sub time code.
:Outputs the time code recorded in the main time code.
:VITC time code is not output from the [VIDEO OUT]
connector.
VITC (1): Regenerates the VITC time code superimposed on the video
signal input through the rear panel VIDEO IN connector.
● On-screen display of sub
time code
● User bit data selection
Factory setting :TC (1)
Sub time code is displayed
with the main time code
when menu switch No. 451
<VITC OUT SELECT>
is set to “SUB TC (0)”.
● Menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> (initial setting OFF (0))
● Select the Time Code Output mode during search.
Menu switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC>
OFF (0): User bits regenerated by the time code generator of this unit is
recorded.
OFF (0) :Outputs time code through the [TC OUT] connector during search
at X1.
ON (1):
The user bit auto preset function is activated and the user bit
data stored in the built-in memory is recorded.
● Select the sub time code.
ON (1) :Outputs time code through the [TC OUT] connector during search
at all speeds. Continuous time code is not available.
● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC> (Initial setting: ON(1))
OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code.
3. Play back the time code.
Press the [PLAY] button.
ON (1):
Records the input VITC time code in the sub time code.
3. Record the time code.
[ The selected time code is played back.
Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button.
TCR or UBR is shown with the on-screen time code data.
[ The selected time code will be recorded.
● LTC time code is output from the [TC OUT] connector.
● Main or sub time code selected with menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT
SELECT> is superimposed on video signals and output to the line selected
with menu switch No. 400 and No. 401 from the [VIDEO OUT] connector.
100
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE
10-5 SUB TIME CODE RECORDING AND PLAYBACK
10-6 TIME CODE SWITCH SETTING FOR EDITING
In addition to the main time code used for editing, this unit can also record (and play back) an optional sub time
code in the time code data area on the tape.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Recording sub time code
Variable Motion
● In the sub time code sector, you can record either the same data as in the main
time code or the VITC time code received through the [VIDEO IN] connector.
TIME CDOE
DF
INT FREE PRESET
NDF EXT REC REGEN
8
ON
RF
HID
GND
OFF
1. Select data to be recorded on the sub time code.
Notes
● When menu switch No. 450
SERVICE USE ONLY
ON
CF
4
OFF
(625) OSCREEN
● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC>
TIME CDOE
FREE PRESET
<SUB TC<VITC> REC> is
set to “ON (1)”
OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code.
ON (1): Records the VITC received from the [VIDEO IN] connector on the
DF
INT
Front sub panel
The sub time code is
sub time code.
REGEN
NDF EXT REC
regenerated with the VITC
Initial setting: ON (1)
signal superimposed on the
2. Record the sub time code.
Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button.
The selected time code will be recorded.
video signal from the
[VIDEO IN] connector.
● Set the switches on the BR-D95U (recording VCR) as follows.
Front panel switch setting
Note
Play back the sub time code.
If there is no external sync
signal generator available,
send a video input signal to
the [VIDEO REF IN] connector
on the recording VCR.
● [INT/EXT] switch: Set to “INT”.
● Sub time code data is output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector as a VITC time
code signal superimposed on the video signal.
● [REC/FREE] switch: Set to “FREE”.
● [PRESET/REGEN] switch: Set to “PRESET”.
● Set the menu switches as required.
1. Enable sub time code playback.
● Set menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUTSEL> to “SUB TC (0)”.
Factory setting: TC (1)
● When menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> is set to “ON (1)”, the user
● [TC OUT] connector output
bit data stored in memory is recorded.
2. Play back the sub time code.
No sub time code data is
output through the rear
panel [TC OUT] connector.
Only main time code (LTC)
is output from the built-in
time code reader.
Press the [PLAY] button.
● Send an external sync signal to the [VIDEO REF IN]
connector for editing.
[ Sub time code data is output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector as a VITC
time code signal superimposed on the video signal.
Sub time code data (indicated with SUB) is shown with the main time code
on the on-screen display (with menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION
SELECT> set to “TIME+SUB TC (3)” or “TIME+SUB TC+MODE (4)”).
Deliver a black burst or a standard color signal as an external sync signal.
Time Code Signal Flow
Time code data flow depends on the setting of the menu switch or the [INT/EXT]
switch.
Use this as a reference for switch setting.
INT/EXT switch
Recording area
INT
Internal time code
generator
TC OUT
Recording
system
Playback system
TC
Main time
code domain
EXT
LTC
LINE OUT
TC IN
OFF
ON
00:00:00:00
VITC
Sub time
code domain
SUB TC
Menu switch No.451
<VITC OUT SELECT>
Menu switch No.409
<EXT REGEN TC>
VIDEO IN
(LINE /
Menu switch No.450
<SUB TC (VITC) REC>
COMPONENT/
SERIAL V/A)
102
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-1 OUTLINE
11-2 COLOR FRAME SERVO SETTING
NTSC : 4-field color frame servo function available
PAL : 4 or 8-field color frame servo function available
Two electronic editing modes are available: insert editing and assemble editing. Signals from a video camera, on-
air signals and playback signals from another VCR can be used in either type of editing.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
Assemble editing
Insert editing
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
With assemble editing, scenes are added one after
the other in predetermined order. Video, audio, and
control signals are recorded simultaneously. To
ensure stable editing, CTL signals must be recorded
prior to the first edit point for a period exceeding the
preroll time (typically, about 30 seconds).
Insert editing allows you to insert new audio or video
material between existing scenes that have already
been recorded. You can choose different video and
audio and combine them for insertion.
CTL signals must be recorded continuously in the
section where the new material is being inserted.
Before editing, record CTL signals for a period
exceeding the editing time.
Variable Motion
TIME CDOE
DF
INT FREE PRESET
NDF EXT REC REGEN
OFF
8
ON
RF
HID
GND
SERVICE USE ONLY
ON
CF
4
OFF
(625ON SCREEN
OFF
8
Edit-out point
Preroll point Edit-in point
Front sub panel
4
ON
CF
(625)
Preroll point
Recorder
Edit-in point
Edit-out point
[CF] indicator
Recorder
Recording
525
CF
CONDITION
CTL signals required
● Color frame information is always recorded regardless of the setting of the front
sub panel’s CF switches and menu switches (except during editing).
NTSC:4-field color frame
H
M
S
F
* Since the full erase head operates during assemble
editing, a non-recorded segment is produced after the
postroll point. If assemble editing is applied in the
middle of a recorded tape, the picture will be distorted
after the postroll point.
CTL signals required
PAL :8-field color frame
● During recording, the CF indicator lights on the counter display.
● If you want to synchronize time code with color frame, set menu switch No. 421
<TCG CF FLAG> to “ON” or “AUTO”.
Ⅲ Color frame-related menu
switches
• No. 009 <CAP RE-
LOCKING DIR.>
Selects the direction of
the color frame servo
lock.
• No. 387 <CF FLAG
REPLY>
Selects the field unit for
the color frame flag
transmitted from the 9-pin
remote control connector.
(See page 106.)
• No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG>
Turns the color frame flag
for the time code bit ON/
OFF. (See page 106)
Ⅲ Color frame editing is still
possible even when
material that does not
contain color frame
● To record CTL signals, record a black picture from the built-in signal generator or connect a camera or a
standard TV signal generator and record the output signals.
● Editing is not possible from the very beginning of the tape. The first edit-in point must be registered after the
preroll section.
● Audio signals are not output when color bar signal from the built-in signal generator are inserted for editing
(including preview). Do not select the audio channel for insertion of the color bar signal from the built-in
signal generator. It may not be possible to insert the signal properly on the audio channel.
Playback
The color frame servo function can be set with the front sub panel’s CF switches
and menu switches.
Ⅲ
Front sub panel switch setting
• Set menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK (525)> or No. 008p <CAP LOCK (625)>
to “SW SEL”.
• Set the [CF] switch on the front sub panel to “ON”.
For PAL, select the 4 or 8-field color frame servo with the [4/8] switch.
When the [CF] switch is set to “OFF”, the frame servo is activated.
● Preroll time
● Program Playback speed can be varied between
90% and 110%. The range is always the same
even if an external controller or other unit is
connected that sets the range outside this limit.
It takes a few seconds for the tape to stabilize after
tape running is started. To ensure that the tape is
stable before it reaches the edit point, the tape
must start running a few seconds before the edit-in
point (prerolling).
Select the preroll time from 0 to 15 seconds with
the recorder’s menu switch No. 320 <PREROLL
TIME>. Use the remote control setting only when
executing editing via a remote controller.
● CTL counter values based on the TIMER-1
PRESET command (44.00) from the editing
controller can be preset only in the Non-drop Frame
mode (NTSC).
Ⅲ
Menu switch setting
• For NTSC, set menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK (525)> to “4FIELD”.
• For PAL, set menu switch No. 008p <CAP LOCK (625)> to “4FIELD” or
“8FIELD”.
Cautions
● The displayed image may be distorted when the
editing mode is preset from an editing controller
during editing or the mode is switched between
EE and PB. This is normal. It is not a
malfunction. The distortions appear in the
editing output image but are not recorded.
● The V. Fade function may not function correctly
when a tape with edited audio is played back.
This is normal. It is not a malfunction.
● Noise may be recorded if all insert modes are
canceled during editing with any of editing mode
select buttons. This is normal. It is not a
malfunction.
Menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK>
SW SEL :Select with the front sub panel’s [CF] switches.
2FIELD :Playback is performed with the 2-field servo system. Color framing is
not executed.
4FIELD :Playback is performed with the 4-field color frame servo system.
8FIELD :Playback is performed with the 8-field color frame servo system (PAL
only).
information (have no 4-field
NTSC color frame
information or 8-field PAL
color frame information) is
inserted in a color frame-
recorded section. Once the
new material has been
inserted, color frame
editing can be performed
by re-editing. In this case,
the [CF] indicator on the
main unit lights.
● [CF] indicator
If the front sub panel [CF] switches are set to any position except OFF, the CF
indicator lights whenever a tape with color frame information is played back.
Editing precision during color frame editing
When the color frame servo function is used, the edit point may shift to
maintain color frame continuity even though menu switch No. 393 <SYNC
GRADE> is set to “ACCURATE”.
● Noise may be heard when editing is on or off in
the Playback mode. This is normal. It is not a
malfunction.
104
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-3 SWAP EDITING
11-2 COLOR FRAME SERVO SETTING
This unit is provided with a SWAP editing function which enables automatic editing without a controller. When this
unit is connected to a player provided with a RS-422 serial remote connector (9-pin), you can operate both units
using the recorder’s controls.
An on-screen function allows you to check editing data for faster, more efficient editing.
During swap editing, all the player can be operated from the recorder.
Ⅵ Color frame reference
VIDEO IN
LINE IN monochrome input
COMPONENT IN
SDI IN
LINE IN color signal input
REF IN
REC
EDIT PB
LINE IN
PB
REC
PB
REF IN is
Gen locking
LINE IN
REF IN
REF IN
REF IN
Editing procedure
STEP-7
STEP-1
STEP-2
STEP-3
STEP-6
STEP-4
REF IN is not
Gen locking
Internal
reference
signal
Color frame
information is
recorded according
to the time code.
Internal reference
signal
STEP-5
Edit point
entry
Editing
(actual)
Preview editing
(rehearsal)
Edit point
correction
Review
(check)
Edit mode
selection
Next
edit
Preparation
The color frame sync condition of the playback shown in the table above changes depending on the setting of menu switch No. 008 <CAP
LOCK>.
Check
Preparation
Editing
Ⅵ TC color frame flag setting
● The time code color frame flag can be set and recorded only when the front sub panel’s [TIME CODE]
● When only edit start is performed automatically, steps 4, 5 and 7 can be omitted depending on the editing
method (for example, preview editing is not required).
switches are set as follows.
[INT/EXT] switch
[PRESET/REGEN] switch : PRESET
: INT
STEP-1 preparation
When the [TIME CODE] switches are set as above, the time code color frame flag is recorded according to
the setting of menu switch No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG MODE>.
Connection
• Make sure all video and audio input/output connectors are properly connected.
• Connect the BR-D95U’s [REMOTE OUT(9P)] connector to the player’s RS-422 serial remote connector with
the 9-pin remote cable.
During playback During EE output
TCG CF FLAG setting
Menu switch
NO. 421 <TCG
CF FLAG
CF FLAG being recorded on tape
MODE>
Setting
OFF
OFF information OFF information OFF information is recorded
is output is output
ON information ON information
is output is output
Ⅲ Setting the player
ON
ON information
is recorded
● When recording time code with the [INT/EXT] switch set to “INT”
and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch set to “PRESET” (except in
editing)
• Set the VCR operation mode to the REMOTE mode.
• Adjust the video control parameters.
*Time code is based on the information recorded before the
recording is paused. (i.e. “REC” [ “PAUSE” [ “REC” ) with the
REGEN or REC RUN setting.
● To record time code during assemble or time code insert editing
(with tape recorded on BR-D95U).
• Adjust the playback level with the audio playback level adjust knobs (this is not necessary for UNITY).
• Set the edit OUT point registering method with menu switch No. 373.
Ⅲ Setting the recorder
*Set menu switch No. 410 <AUTO REGEN MODE> to a valid
setting (or set to “OFF” if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to
“REGEN”) and the [INT/EXT] switch is set to “INT” under the 4-
field (8-field in PAL) color frame servo.
● Front panel setting
• No. 328 <EDIT POINT CLEAR>: Set whether or not
the edit IN point is canceled when editing is complete.
• No. 367 <EDIT INTERRUPTION>: Set whether or
not the editing operation is stopped when an error
occurs in the video signal during preroll editing .
• No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP MODE>: Set whether or
not pressing the [RECORDER] and [PLAYER]
buttons simultaneously is possible.
• No. 373 <MATCH FRAME>:This setting determines
whether or not the match frame function is used.
• No. 390 <SWAP VTR SELECT>: Set according
to the type of player VCR. Normally set to “AUTO”.
• No. 391 <SYNCHRONIZATION>: Switch the
Bump mode ON/OFF during swap editing.
• No. 393 <SYNC GRADE>: Select the editing
accuracy during swap editing.
• No. 395 <AUTO EE>: Set whether or not the auto
EE function is used during swap editing.
Set to “AUTO-EE (1)” when using only one
monitor for editing.
• No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN>: Selects whether
or not the edit display is shown on screen during
editing.
• Set the VCR operation mode to “Local” with the
[REMOTE] button (the [REMOTE] indicator on
the display goes out).
• Select the input signal with the video and audio
input signal select buttons.
• Adjust the recording level with the audio recording
level adjust knobs (this is not necessary for
UNITY).
• Set the counter mode with the [COUNTER]
button.
● Front sub panel setting
Set the time code-related switches for time code
editing.
(When editing the time code, be sure to input an
external sync signal to the recorder and player.)
• [INT/EXT] switch: Set to “INT”.
• [REC/FREE] switch: Set to “FREE”.
• [PRESET/REGEN]: Set to “PRESET”.
● Menu switch setting
OFF information ●When recording time code under any conditions except those
is recorded
described above.
AUTO
The information The same
recorded on the setting as the
ON information
is recorded
●When recording time code with the [INT/EXT] switch set to “INT”
and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch set to “PRESET” (except in
editing)
*Time code is based on the information recorded before the
recording is paused. (i.e. “REC” [ “PAUSE” [ “REC” )with the
REGEN or REC RUN setting.
●To record time code during assemble or time code insert editing
(with tape recorded on BR-D95U).
*Set menu switch No. 410 <AUTO REGEN MODE> to a valid
setting (or set to “OFF” if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to
“REGEN”) and the [INT/EXT] switch is set to “INT” under the 4-
field (8-field in PAL) color frame servo.
tape is output.
one of TCG CF
FLAG being
recorded on the
tape is output.
OFF information ●When recording time code under any conditions except those
is recorded
described above.
* The set time code value may shift when menu switch No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG MODE> is set to “ON” or “AUTO” and recording is
performed with TC PRESET.
Ⅵ 9P color frame flag
• No. 003 <SYNC SELECT>: Set to “EXT (1)” to
synchronize with an external sync signal.
• No. 320 <PREROLL TIME>: Set the preroll time.
9P color frame flag is set when the setting of menu switch No. 387 <CF FLAG REPLY> matches that of menu
switch No. 008 <CAP. LOCK>.
106
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-3 SWAP EDITING
11-3 SWAP EDITING
[ENTRY] button
[RESET] button
● Preparation of the recording (editing master) tape
•
Use the learn function
when the connected player
is a non-DIGITAL S VCR.
To activate the learn
[IN] button
[OUT] button
Assemble editing
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
CTL signals must be recorded for a period exceeding the preroll time before the
first edit IN point.
Non-recorded tape
0
0
0
UB
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
function, press the
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
[RECORDER] and [SHIFT]
buttons simultaneously.
By using the learn function,
you can reduce the
X1
X-1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
• Record video signals such as a black picture from the built-in signal generator
for a period exceeding the preroll time before the first edit IN point.
• When editing time code, record time code in the section before the first edit IN
point.
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
number of retries in editing.
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
(e.g.)
Set the time code of the first edit IN point to “00:00:00:00” and record time code
for 20 seconds in the section before the edit IN point.
• Set the REC Run mode to the time code preset mode and preset the time code
to “23:59:40:00”.
[CANCEL] button
STEP-3 edit point entry
• Record time code for 20 seconds or more.
Enter the edit IN points for the player and recorder and the edit OUT point for the
player or recorder.
1. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR to be operated.
2. Search the edit IN point with the search dial or jog dial.
3. Enter the edit IN point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [IN]
button.
[ The [IN] button is illuminated and the edit IN point is entered.
Ⅲ Enter the edit IN points for both the player and recorder.
4. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR for which the edit
OUT point is entered.
5. Search the edit OUT point with the search dial or jog dial and engage the Still
mode.
6. Enter the edit OUT point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the
[OUT] button.
● Whenever you enter a new
edit point, the previously
registered edit point is
automatically canceled.
● Edit points can be entered
during normal VCR
Edit IN point
00:00:00:00
Beginning of the tape
23:59:40:00
• After recording is complete, set the [REC/FREE] switch FREE.
Insert editing
CTL signals or time code data must be recorded continuously in the section for
insertion.
playback.
● If an edit IN point has not
been entered, an edit IN
point will be entered
automatically at the point
where the [AUTO EDIT]
button is pressed.
● Variable playback speed
during swap editing
The recorder’s variable
playback speed is -1.0x to
+1.0x. The player's
STEP-2 editing mode selection
[ The [OUT] button is illuminated and the edit OUT point is entered.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
[ASSEM] button
ON
I
Ⅲ Correcting or canceling the edit point
● Correcting the edit point
• Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons to correct the
edit point in frames.
● Correct the duration.
• Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons simultaneously.
Frame correction is possible.
● Canceling the edit point
• To cancel the edit IN or OUT point
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
[INSERT]
button
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
AP
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
A
U
TO
O
F
F
P
.
R
E
A
D
V
.
V
A
R
P
B
/
E
E
O
T
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
ENTRY
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
TC
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
variable playback speed is
-2.0x to +3.0x.
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
INSERT
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Press the [CANCEL] button while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button.
• To cancel both edit IN and OUT points simultaneously
Press the [RESET] button.
• To cancel the player and recorder edit points as well as the audio split
point: Press the [AUTO EDIT] + [CANCEL]. The selected edit modes
(ASSEM, INSERT) and VAR SPEED are not canceled.
● Assemble editing
To execute assemble editing, press the [ASSEM] button ON beforehand. Once
editing starts, ON/OFF is not possible.
To disengage the editing
mode
•
Press the illuminated button
again to turn off the editing
mode. The button’s light will
go out.
● Press the [AUTO EDIT]
button while pressing the
[SHIFT] button to execute
a “last edit”.
● Insert editing
Ⅲ Checking the entered edit point/duration time (length of the edit)
To execute insert editing, press the [INSERT] button(s) ON for the signal(s) you
want to insert (VIDEO, DA1, DA2, DA3, DA4).
Even while insert editing is in progress, each button can be turned ON/OFF as
required. To insert time code, set the [TC] button to ON.
• Checking the entered edit point
To view the registered edit point on the counter display,
press the [IN] or [OUT] button.
•
When the [ASSEM] button
is illuminated, press the
[INSERT] button to
IN
ENTRY
OUT
disengage the Assemble
mode. When the [INSERT]
button is illuminated, press
the [ASSEM] button to
disengage the Insert mode.
* If no edit point has been entered, the display will be
blank (edit point is not shown).
• Checking the duration time
[OUT]
button
[IN]
button
Pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons simultaneously
shows the edit duration on the counter display.
108
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-3 SWAP EDITING
11-3 SWAP EDITING
[SEARCH] button
[IN] button
[OUT] button
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
dB
0
R
P
dB
0
R
P
dB
0
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB
0
dB
OVER
dB
OVER
dB
OVER
dB
OVER
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
UB
UB
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+2
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
MENU
REC
SET
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X1
X-1
X-1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
REC
INSERT
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
REV
FWD
[AUTO EDIT]
button
[STOP] button
[SHIFT] button
[PREVIEW] button
[PREVIEW] button
[STOP] button
Search dial
STEP-4 preview editing
STEP-6 editing (actual)
You can skip STEP-4 and STEP-5 and advance to STEP-6.
● When menu switch No. 367
<EDIT INTERRUPTION> is
set to “ON (1)” and an error
occurs in the video signals
during preroll, actual editing
will not take place.
1. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button.
● During insert editing, it is
possible to change the
channel being inserted.
● Set whether or not the edit
point is automatically
cleared after editing is
complete with menu switch
No. 328 <EDIT POINT
CLEAR>
1. Press the [PREVIEW] button.
• The [PREVIEW] button is illuminated and both player and recorder start
The [AUTO EDIT] button lights and both player and recorder start
AUTO EDIT
prerolling.
prerolling.
When the player anzd recorder finish prerolling, both enter the Play
mode automatically. When the recorder reaches the edit IN point, it
automatically switches to the Record mode (actual recording starts).
Editing ends automatically at the edit OUT point.
When an edit has been completed, the recorder continues to run the
tape for about 2 seconds (recording for assemble editing and
playback for insert editing), then rewinds it automatically one frame
before the edit OUT point and enters the Still mode.
• When the player and recorder complete prerolling, they automatically enter the
Play mode and start preview (rehearsal) editing. After the recorder passes the
IN point, it enters the Stop mode*. In this case, the recorder’s operation mode
is shown as “SEL” (Select EE) in the editing screen display.
Ⅲ If the edit duration (from the IN point to the OUT point) is long and you only want
to preview the edit IN point, press the [STOP] button to end preview editing.
* If time code is
discontinuous in preview,
the preroll point will not be
cued up in actual editing.
To avoid this, the recorder
enters the Stop mode after
it passes the IN point in the
Preview mode. (only in
Assemble Editing)
4
Ⅲ Counter display in the Preview mode
A pseudo-advanced time code value is displayed on this unit and in the
recorder’s counter in the editing screen display. This gives the user an
approximate idea of the running time.
Ⅲ To stop editing before completion, press the [AUTO EDIT] button or press the
[ENTRY] button while pressing the [OUT] button.
[Editing screen display]
Recorder operation mode
The normal on-screen display shows the time code value at the stop position.
(only in Assemble Editing)
V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC
P:PLAY
CTL
0:01:48:00
R:SEL
CTL
E
F
STEP-7 review (check)
0:00:05:00
P
IN
OUT
R
'
0:01:48:00
0:02:31:04
SPLIT
:15:01
-
● This step is optional.
IN
'
0:00:00:00
0:00:43:04
DUR.
:43:04 OUT'
1. Press the [PREVIEW] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.
• The recorder rewinds the tape automatically to the edit IN point and starts
playback.
Recorder counter display
section
• After the edit OUT point is passed, the tape runs for about 1 seconds and the
VCR enters the Still mode.
Ⅲ To cancel the review operation after it has started
Press the [STOP] button.
STEP-5 correcting the edit point
If correction is not necessary, skip STEP-5 and advance to STEP-6.
● If a major correction is required, enter the edit point again in STEP-3. The previously
entered edit point is automatically canceled.
● If only a minor correction is required,
1. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR for correction.
2. Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button to correct the edit IN or
OUT point in frames.
110
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-4 AUDIO SPLIT EDITING
11-5 OTHER FUNCTION
Additional editing functions available with the BR-D95U include:
• Last edit function
• Variable-motion editing
This function allows you to specify the audio edit IN point independently of the video edit IN point (in ordinary
editing, audio and video signals have the same edit point). This enables independent insertion of audio and video.
• Motion memory function
• Audio split editing is possible only in the Insert Edit mode.
• It is not possible to set the audio edit IN point separately for each channel (DA1/DA2/DA3/DA4).
[SEARCH] button
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
Insert
buttons
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH4
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
VCON
HOLD
REMOTE
COUNTER RESET
AP
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9
AUTO OFF P.READ V.VAR PB/EE REMOTE
525
625
CONDITION
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
UB
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PB
PB/EE
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
Video IN point
Audio IN point
OUT point
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
METER MODE
FINE
TRACKING
STILL
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
H
M
S
F
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
[IN]
Recorder
Video signal
Audio signal
STAND BY
REW
button
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
[SHIFT] button
[AUTO EDIT] button
[PREVIEW] button
PULL
RELEASE
[SHIFT]
button
Search dial
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
Direction for delay
Direction for advance
[AUTO EDIT] button
[ENTRY] button
Variable-motion initial
speed value setting
Setting procedure
1. In the Variable mode,
turn the search dial to
select the initial speed
value.
[ The initial speed
value is determined
by the rotation angle
of the search dial
and is shown on the
screen and counter
display.
2. Press the [SET] button
to define the initial
speed value.
•After this operation, the
initial speed value
does not change even
if the search dial is
turned.
•To change this value,
press the [STOP]
button to release the
Variable mode, then
select the initial speed
value again.
•If the [STOP] button is
not pressed, the initial
speed value is called
when the Variable
mode is engaged
again after being
Ⅲ Last edit:
Jog dial
Once editing has been completed, the last edit can be recalled and executed.
Press the [AUTO EDIT] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button. Each time
this operation is repeated, the last edit and current edit are switched.
V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC
Procedure
1. Engage the Insert Edit mode.
P:STOP
CTL
R:SHTL STIL
CTL
E
F
Ⅲ Variable-motion editing
-0:00:51:03
0:01:48:00
Press the insert mode buttons ([VIDEO], [DA1], [DA2], [DA3], [DA4] buttons] as
required.
P
IN
The BR-D95U’s Variable-Motion editing mode allows you to play back tapes on
the player at variable speed (-2x to 3x). This is ideal for variable-motion editing
and other special effects.
'
0:01:48:00
0:01:31:04
SPLIT
:15:01
OUT
R
-
* Press the [VIDEO] button and at least one of the audio channels ([DA1], [DA2],
[DA3] or [DA4] ).
IN
'
0:00:00:00
0:00:43:04
DUR.
:43:04 OUT'
● Operation: On the recorder (BR-D95U)
2. Enter the edit IN point for both player and recorder.
The entered edit IN point is used as the edit IN point for video.
1. Press the [RECORDER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “recorder”.
2. Select the recorder’s editing mode (insert or assemble).
3. Register the recorder’s edit points.
3. Search the recorder’s audio edit IN point with the search or jog dial operation
and engage the Still mode.
•
Correcting the audio edit IN
point
4. Press the [PLAYER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “player”.
5. Register the player’s edit IN point.
6. Press the [SEARCH] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.
The player enters the Variable mode.
To release the Variable mode, press the [STOP], [FF] , [REW] or [SEARCH]
button. To engage the Variable mode again, execute the operation in step 6.
7. Set the playback speed.
• The player plays back the tape at the specified speed (from -2x to 3x).
Speed is set by the direction and angle of the search dial rotation.
• Press the [SET] button to register the variable-motion initial speed value.
Refer to the left column.
4. Enter the audio edit IN point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the
[SHIFT] and [IN] buttons.
Turn the jog dial while
pressing the [SHIFT] and
[IN] buttons to correct the
audio edit IN point in
frames.
IN
ENTRY
[ The selected audio insert button blinks, showing that the audio
IN point has been entered.
SHIFT
5. Enter the edit OUT point for the player or recorder.
The edit OUT point is set at the same point for audio and video.
6. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button. Editing starts automatically.
• The player’s playback speed is shown on the recorder’s counter display in
percentages (e.g. -200%: -2x, 300%: 3x ).
Playback speed can also be determined automatically by setting all four edit
points.
Ⅲ Disengaging the Audio Split mode
IN
• Press the [CANCEL] button while pressing the [SHIFT] and [IN]
buttons.
[The audio insert button lights, showing that the Audio Split
Edit mode has been disengaged.
CANCEL
8. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button to start editing.
SHIFT
Notes:
● Use the variable speed value for the player shown on the BR-D95U’s
counter display as a guide. Actual playback speed depends on the player.
● Use a variable speed within the range -1x through 1x. When the BR-D95U
is used as a player, out-of-range variable speed will distort the picture and/
or sound.
released.
112
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 EDITING
11 EDITING
11-7 EDITING WITH THE PRE-READ FUNCTION
11-5 OTHER FUNCTION
The pre-read function makes it easy to add A/B roll editing-style wipes and fades even when using only one player. Pre-read
works by reading out the image or sound at the recording start position just before recording starts during editing. Special effects
or mixer can then be added to the read-out picture or sound which is then recorded at its original position together with the
incoming material. And because both sources (the player and recorder) can handle moving pictures, you’ll be able to achieve
smooth, natural and professional looking special editing effects. Pre-read can be used with both video and audio signals.
Ⅲ Motion memory function
The motion memory function allows you to manually store the player’s playback
speed data in memory. You can call up this data later for variable-motion
editing.
(Editing screen)
Tape speed
Feature Comparison of Pre-Read with Conventional A/B Roll Editing.
● Operation : on the recorder (BR-D95U)
V•A1•A2•A3•A4
P:VAR
CTL
0:00:01:00
P
R:SHTL STIL
1. Register the edit IN points for the recorder and player (do not register the
edit OUT point for the player).
Conventional A/B roll editing system
A
Pre-read A/B roll editing system
A
CTL
E
F
12:00:00:00
IN
0:00:01:00
2. Press the [PLAYER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “player”.
Player 1
120 OUT
+050 MM
P
R
C
R
IN
3. Press the [SEARCH] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to engage the
Variable mode. Press the [SET] button to register the variable-motion initial
speed value. Refer to the “Variable-motion initial speed value setting” in the
margin on the previous page.
Special-effects
Special-effects
device
Player
Recorder
Recorder
12:00:00:00
device
OUT
Player 2
C
B
B
Motion memory
The number of steps
remaining
4. Set the playback speed (first speed) to be stored in the motion memory by
turning the search dial.
Source material is on two tapes.
One tape is played back by each player.
Source material is obtained from the player's playback
picture and the pre-read picture.
Material from the recorder can be obtained automatically.
Duration
5. Press the [PREVIEW] button to reproduce the motion memory data and turn
the search dial to control the playback speed.
After the edit IN point, the playback speed set by the angle of the search dial
rotation is stored in memory.
• Up to 128 steps can be stored in the motion memory. The number of steps
remaining is shown on the editing screen.
• When the motion memory function is activated, “MM” is shown on the
editing screen. As long as MM data is stored in memory, the [PREVIEW]
button will blink.
Moving picture and sound
(picture from one player and pre-read picture from
the recorder)
Moving picture and sound (two players)
• When 128 steps are
stored in the motion
memory, the [PREVIEW]
button stops blinking and
lights steadily.
• Use the variable speed
value for the player
shown on the BR-D95U’s
counter display as a
guide. Actual playback
speed depends on the
player.
Edit point settings required for one player and one
recorder.
Edit point settings required for two players and one
recorder.
6. Register the edit OUT point to end the motion memory setting.
• To store the speed in memory again, press the [PREVIEW] button. The
edit OUT point is automatically canceled.
• To check the stored data, press the [PREVIEW] button while pressing the
[SHIFT] button (Motion preview).
Picture from player 1
Pre-read picture
A
A
Recorded picture
Recorded picture
7. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button to start editing.
C
C
If playback speed has not been stored in the motion memory, turning the
search dial during editing also controls the playback speed. However, speed
data cannot be stored in memory during editing.
Picture from player 2
Playback picture
B
B
The playback picture and sound
from the player and the pre-read
picture from the recorder are
mixed (wiped) for recording.
Playback pictures and
sound from players 1/2
are mixed (wiped) for
recording.
11-6 MANUAL EDITING
When editing with a camera or a VCR (player) without an RS-422 serial remote connector, use the BR-D95U’s
[AUTO EDIT] and [PREROLL] buttons for editing.
Ⅵ Setting the pre-read function...Set before making the pre-read connection.
● BR-D95U menu switch No. 351 <PREREAD>
Set menu switch No. 351 <PREREAD> to “OFF” when using an editing controller with pre-read capability. Set menu
switch No. 351 <PREREAD> to “ON” when using an editing controller with no pre-read capability. This menu switch can
be switched ON/OFF independently for video and audio.
● When audio pre-read is performed, it is recommended to use the [AUDIO REC] volume knobs preset position because
audio level for recording cannot be checked.
● Setting the audio output phase for audio pre-read
Use <AUDIO PHASE> in the audio control menu to adjust the audio output phase to correspond with the video output
phase (see page 118).
Ⅲ Use the BR-D95U as the recorder.
1. Select assemble or insert editing with the edit mode select buttons.
• For insert editing, select the signal to be edited.
2. Search the edit IN point with the search and jog dials on the recorder and
engage the Still mode.
3. Input the signal from the player or camera.
● Correcting audio output phase delay during audio pre-read
4. Press the recorder’s [AUTO EDIT] button.
• The recorder prerolls and starts the editing operation.
• Recording starts automatically at the edit IN point.
To correct audio output timing, set menu switch No. 352 <AUD PREREAD TIMING> to “OFF SET”. Correction is
performed by detecting the delay of the external video device based on the delay set with <AUDIO PHASE> in the audio
control menu.
Cautions
5. To stop editing, press the recorder’s [AUTO EDIT] button.
• The recorder enters the Still mode. The edit OUT point is automatically
entered as the edit IN point for the next edit.
● Before the pre-read menu switch setting is released, be sure to disconnect the units for pre-read editing.
Otherwise, a loop occurs in the connection cables, causing excessive sound volume and distortion which may
damage the connected equipment.
● It is not possible to rewrite sub time code data when the pre-read function is used.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to continue editing.
114
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
11 EDITING
To ensure accurate, error-free editing with an AB roll editing system or any other multiple-unit system, you must
adjust the phase of the built-in time base corrector (TBC) after connecting all system components.
Phase adjustment must be updated each time you replace a connection cable, add or replace one of the units, or
make any other changes.
11-7 EDITING WITH THE PRE-READ FUNCTION
Example of editing system configuration
An example of a pre-read editing system is shown below.
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
12-1 CONNECTION
Program
output
Main
monitor
Pre-read
output
Connection
Genlocking signal
Preview
switch
(
)
B.B
Player 1
Player 2
Recorder
AUDIO
REF IN
REF IN
REF IN
VIDEO
Special-effects
device
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
Recorder
BR-D95U
Player
BR-D95U
BR-D95U
BR-D95U
Special-effects
device
AUDIO MONITOR
GPI 1/2
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
GPI 3/4
Editing controller
RM-G820U
9-pin (RS-422)
9-pin (RS-422)
● Preview switcher
Automatically switches the signal shown on the main monitor in conjunction with editing controller operation.
(e.g. SW-320 from Imeginics Co., Ltd.)
● Enables editing without separate monitors for program output and pre-read output.
● When using an editing controller provided with the pre-read function, is not necessary to set menu switch No.
351 <PRE READ> on the BR-D95U to “OFF”.
Input player 1
B.B OUT
Input player 2
These two cables
should be the
same length.
PGM OUT
MONITOR OUT
Usable controller: RM-G820U
● When using the RM-G820U, check that the model name shown on its packing case ends with (A) and that (A)
is indicated on the serial number plate on the controller.
Special-effects device (switcher)
● The RM-G820U is not ready for audio insert editing on CH3 and CH4. To select insertion on CH3 and CH4 with
this unit, change the settings of menu switch No. 377 <AUD EDIT PRESET CH3> and No. 378 <AUD EDIT
PRESET CH4>.
Input A
Input A
Upgrading is required if the RM-G820U
without (A) indication is used.
Positions indicating (A)
Monitor
Waveform monitor
Vectorscope
SW1
DC 9V IN
POWER
ON
PLAYER
PLAYER
OFF
RM-G820U(A)
(A)
RECORDER
RECORDER
SYNC
IN
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR IN
GPI
9P
9P
10KEY IN
RECORDER
PLAYER
Input B
Input B
(A)
Genlocking signal
Notes:
(
)
B.B
75 Ø
• Note on the special effects generator
As most special effects generators provided with a DVE (Digital Video Effect) function have a built-in frame
memory, one frame delay occurs if the pre-read function of the BR-D95U is used. To avoid this, only use
special effects generators with no frame memory (such as JVC’s KM-3000) or ones provided with a function
that allows you to bypass the frame memory.
• When menu switch No.351 <PRE READ> is set to “VID-ON” or “AUD-ON”, the Record mode cannot be
engaged (pressing both the [REC] and [PLAY] buttons has no effect).
Send external reference sync signals from the sync signal generator to the system components.
Composite video signals are delivered as video signals.
• When editing with the pre-read function, the material on the tape in the recorder is replaced with the special-
effects pictures. If you want to keep the original material, be sure to back up the original tape.
• When video phase shifting is obvious in video signals inserted for pre-read editing, adjust the video phase
(refer to page 120).
• If the editing controller is not provided with the pre-read function, set menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> of
the recorder BR-D95U to “ON”.
* When editing on directly connected VCRs without a switcher, adjustment of system and subcarrier phases
is not necessary.
116
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
12-2 ADJUSTMENT
12-2 ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the items shown on the counter or on screen display by pressing the front panel [VCON] button.
[SEARCH] button
On screen display
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
ANALOG
<VIDEO CONTROL MENU> 1/2
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
OFF
O
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
AES/EBU
L
LINE
CPN
000
000
000
000
000
0
VIDEO
CHROMA GAIN
GAIN
Variable Motion
ANALOG
COMPONENT DIGITAL
R
OFF
O
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER RESET
VCON
REMOTE
Variable Motion
525
625
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9 AP
TE
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
0
0
0
0
AUTO OFF P.READ V.V
AR
PB/EE
R
E
M
O
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
CHROMA
SETUP
VID (H)
VID (V)
PHASE
LEVEL
PHASE
PHASE
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
CH1
CH3
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
CH2
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
0
0
0
0
R
P
dB
0
R
P
R
P
R
P
COUNTER
RESET
VCON
REMOTE
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
525
625
CTL TC UB DF SERVO CF GEN 16:9 AP
TE
CONDITION
–2
–2
–2
–2
dB
OVER
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
0
0
0
AUTO OFF P.READ V.V
AR
PB/EE
R
E
M
O
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–4
–4
–4
–4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
PB/EE
–60
–60
–60
–60
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
PLAY
MENU
SET
HOLD
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
X1
X-1
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
PHONES
TRACKING
H
M
S
F
REC
–4
–4
–4
–4
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
IN
VIDEO
DA1
OUT
DA2
DA3
DA4
REC
PLAY
EJECT
PAUSE/STILL
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
X1
X-1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
00
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
SYSTEM PHASE
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
INSERT
ENTRY
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
000
000
OFF
OFF
SC
PHASE
SHIFT
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
STAND BY
REW
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
REV
FWD
AUTO EDIT
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
PREROLL
USER
SCH
PHASE
PULL
RELEASE
PULL
RELEASE
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
VIDEO
VIDEO
ALL UNITY
REMOTE
Counter display
Counter display
[VCON] button
[VCON] button
Jog dial
Adjustment items
Adjustment items displayed on screen or on the unit’s display are listed in the table below.
●Video control menu (page 1 on screen)
⅜: Possible X: Impossible
Display
On screen
Video signals
LINE CPN SDI
Operation
Adjustment
value
Counter
display
Main TBC 9-pin
unit remote
control
● For individual adjustment, set “VIDEO ALL UNITY” to “off”.
● To make adjustments with the optional TBC remote control unit connected to the rear panel [VIDEO CONTROL]
connector, be sure to set “VIDEO REMOTE” to “ON”.
● YC dealy volume of the TBC remote control(BVR-50) is unavailable.
● You can select the output chroma phase reference signal with menu switch No. 124 <CHROMA ROTE>
(component or composite signals).
Adjustment contents
display
VIDEO GAIN Vgain
Output video level
Output chroma level
-128 to +64
-128 to +64
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
CHROMA
GAIN
Cgain
CHROMA
PHASE
Cphas Output chroma phase
-128 to +127
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
Adjustment
SETUP LEVEL Setup
Output setup level
-128 to +127
-128 to +127
-5 to +5
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
X
⅜
⅜
X
VID (H) PHASE Hphas Output video (horizontal) phase
This section describes the procedure for adjusting video setting value on the operation panel.
VID (V) PHASE Vphas
Output video (vertical) phase
Output system phase
X
1. Press the [VCON] button to display the adjustment items on the counter display.
SYSTEM
PHASE
Sphas
-64 to +64
⅜
⅜
2. Select the adjustment item by turning the jog dial.
[ Adjustment items are shown on the counter display or on screen.
SC
SCph
Output SC phase
0 to 511
0 to 255
ON/OFF
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
SCH
SCHph Output SCH phase
X
X
X
X
3. Adjust the value by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.
• The adjustment items on screen can be selected with the cursor.
• When making an adjustment, refer to an actual signal waveform as shown in the “Adjustment outline for each
item” below.
VIDEO ALL
UNITY
Vunity
Standard setting ON/OFF
VIDEO
REMOTE
Vrem
External video controller ON/OFF
ON/OFF
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other items.
●Audio control menu (page 2 on screen)
5. Press the [SET] or [VCON] button to finish.
[The normal counter display is restored.
Display
Audio signals
EBU
Operation
TBC
remote
control
On screen
Counter Adjustment contents Adjustment ANALOG AES/
display
SDI
Main
unit
9-pin
value
• To reset all video parameters to the default settings, set the adjustment item “VIDEO ALL UNITY” to “ON”.
• To independently set items in the Unity mode, select the desired item and press the [RESET] button. Only the
selected item is set to the standard value.
AUDIO PHASE Aphas
Output audio phase -480 to +720
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
X
X
On screen (page 2)
On screen (page 1)
Counter display
* Set the output timing for the analog/
digital audio playback signal.
Settings below 00 advance the
output timing, while settings above
00 delay the output timing.
<VIDEO CONTROL MENU> 1/2
<AUDIO CONTROL MENU> 2/2
VIDEO
CHROMA GAIN
CHROMA PHASE
SETUP
VID (H)
VID (V)
GAIN
000
000
000
000
000
0
PHASE
+000
AUDIO
LEVEL
PHASE
PHASE
(1 sample: approx. 20 µs)
Adjustment
item
Adjustment
value
SYSTEM PHASE
00
SC
SCH
VIDEO
VIDEO
PHASE
PHASE
ALL UNITY
REMOTE
000
000
OFF
OFF
118
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
12-2 ADJUSTMENT
12-2 ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment outline for each item
System phase/subcarrier phase/SCH phase
The system phase can be varied with the subcarrier-unit step. The relationship between the sync and burst
phase does not change.
● Video level/setup level/chroma level/chroma phase
Use menu switch No. 124 <CHROMA ROTE> to specify whether the chroma phase reference signal is a
composite signal or component signal.
1. Play back a cassette tape with standard color signals recorded on it.
Do not use the built-in color bar signal for adjustment.
2. Adjust the knobs so that the displays on the waveform monitor (WFM) and the vectorscope (VSC)
appear as illustrated below.
The phase in the subcarrier can be varied. The relationship between the sync and burst phase does not change.
● To adjust the phase with reference to sync phase, follow the system phase adjustment procedure described below.
● To adjust the phase with reference to subcarrier phase, adjust the system phase as described below, then
adjust the subcarrier phase.
● To vary sync and burst phase (SCH), adjust it with <SCH PHASE> in the video control menu.
System phase (SYSTEM PHASE) adjustment
Ⅲ Waveforms on the WFM (NTSC signal)
Ⅲ Waveforms on the VSC (NTSC signal)
System phase adjustment matches the VCR’s blanking phase with the switcher’s correct blanking phase. Switch
between the switcher reference signal and the input VCR signal and adjust until there is no change in phase
position. Without this adjustment, video distortion occurs after completion of fading during switching.
R
MG
A:
Video level
Waveforms on a waveform monitor
Phase setting for genlocking signal
1. Set the waveform monitor (WFM)’s input to B and
synchronize with input B. Set the H sync position
with the WFM’s H POSITION volume control to
50% of the H sync level. (Refer to the upper figure
on the left.)
Adjustment of Player 1
2. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device
(switcher).
3. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.
4. Set the WFM’s input to A and synchronize with
input B. Set the [SYSTEM PHASE] item of Player
1 to the same H sync position as step 1. (Refer to
the lower figure on the left.)
YL
The WFM enlarges in 0.1 µsec.
B
Genlocking signal
(H sync)
B:
G
CY
Setup level
50%
A: Video level
50%
Adjust to 100 IRE. (NTSC)
Adjust to 0.7 V (PAL)
C: Chroma level/chroma phase
Adjust the two knobs so that the lighting point of
each vector waveform is located within the
mark.
B: Setup level (NTSC only)
Match
Adjust against deviation.
Player’s video output
(H sync)
50%
Adjustment of Player 2
5. Select Player 2 with the special-effect device
(switcher).
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the system phase
of Player 2.
Video (H) phase (VID (H) PHASE) adjustment
50%
The video phase determines where a picture is located with respect to the sync signal. You can adjust this using
the same waveform monitor used for system phase adjustment. Set the WFM reference sync to INT and adjust
while observing blanking until no part of the VCR picture is missing in the rising section.
If you’re not using a waveform monitor, wipe the picture with the switcher reference signal and adjust until the
entire picture can be seen on the monitor.
(Pay attention to sync fall)
• The KM-D600 switcher is self-adjusting. No
adjustment is required.
Subcarrier phase (SC PHASE) adjustment
NTSC signal
Adjustment of Player 1
waveforms
System subcarrier phase adjustment matches the VCR subcarrier with the reference subcarrier of the switcher.
Adjust so that the reference subcarrier overlaps the VCR subcarrier.
1. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device
(switcher).
Player 1
Phase setting for genlocking signal
1. Set the vector scope’s input to B and synchronize
with input B. Adjust the phase of the burst signal to
the reference line with the vector scope (Refer to
Fig. 2 on the left.).
Adjustment of Player 1
2. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device
(switcher).
3. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.
4. Set the vector scope’s input to A and synchronize
with input B. Adjust the phase of a burst signal to
the reference line by setting the [SC PHASE] item
of Player 1. (Refer to Fig. 2 on the left.)
Adjustment of Player 2
5. Select Player 2 with the special-effects device
(switcher).
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the subcarrier of
Player 2.
Waveforms on the vector scope (NTSC signal)
2. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.
3. Set the WFM’s input to A and synchronize with
input A. Adjust the video phase by setting the [VID
(H) PHASE] item of Player 1 so that none of the
image is missing. (Refer to the upper figure on the
left.)
Burst signal
Burst signal
R
R
MG
MG
YL
YL
B
B
Match
G
G
CY
CY
Adjustment of Player 2
4. Select Player 2 with the special-effects device
(switcher).
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Player 2
5. With the WFM’s input set to A and input A
* ● Adjustment of the KM-D600 switcher is not
necessary as it is self-adjusting.
● Adjustment of the KM-3000 switcher is not necessary
as it is a component switcher.
● Composite switchers other than the KM-D600 must
be adjusted.
synchronized, adjust the video phase by setting
the [VID (H) PHASE] item of Player 2 in the same
way as step 3. (Refer to the lower figure on the
left.)
(WFM: Inside reference sync signal)
120
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT
12-3 DUBBING LOOP FUNCTION
13-1 Command tables
The dubbing loop function allows you to effectively perform analog video signal adjustment.
BASIC TABLE
The dubbing loop function loops video signals and generates color bar signals from the built-in signal generator.
The picture passes through the looped video signal circuit and is fed back and stored in the memory circuit. Then,
instead of outputting color bar signals from the signal generator, the picture stored in memory is output and
passed through the looped video signal circuit the designated number of times. The same effect is obtained each
time this pseudo-dubbing is repeated and the video signal can be adjusted according to the picture output.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
C
D
E
F
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Enter
In Entry
Standby
On
Standby
Off
Auto Edit
TC Preset
Complate
Error
ClearError Out Entry
CueUp with In Flag
Preview
Review
UB Preset
Preroll
CTL Data
Reset
In Data
Preset
Out Data
Preset
CueUp with
Data
Data
Reset
Out Flag
Reset
In Flag
Recall
Out Flag
Recall
Clear
Cassette
Out
Eject
Full Ee
On
Ee off
VIDEO
LINE2
OUT
Not Target
Valiable
Fwd
Valiable
Rev
Edit Preset
Fwd
Shuttle
Rev
VIDEO
LINE
IN
Video signal
playback circuit
Video signal
recording circuit
In Shift(+)
In Shift(-)
Preroll
Time Sense
Status
Sense
TC Data
Sense
CTL Data
Sense
In Data
Sense
Out Data
Sense
UB Data
Sense
JVC Status
Sense
SubTC Data
Sense
SubUB Data
Sense
Preroll Time
Preset
Timer Mode
Select
JVC-1 Table
Select
Basic Table
Select
Shuttle
Color bar
output
Out Shift(+) Go to In
Out Shift(-) Goto Out
Select Ee
On
Ee off
Color bar signal
Edit Preset
(4ch)
Monitor TV
ACK
NAK
Play
RevShuttle Memory
X1
Rec
Rec Request
VTR Ind.
Color bar
Built-in signal
generator
FwdShuttle RevShuttle Memory
Ff
Rec Pause
TimeCode
Switch Preset
X4
FwdShuttle RevShuttle
X0.09 X0.09
FwdShuttle RevShuttle
Still Still
FwdShuttle RevShuttle
X4
Search
Rew
Memory
Switch Preset
VIDEO
LINE1
OUT
Edit On
Edit Off
Stored in the
memory circuit
X6
Stop
X6
Still
Color bar output
Note
For the dubbing loop function, use the composite video signal.
•
JVC-1 TABLE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Enter
In Entry
Standby
On
Standby
Off
1. Connect the rear panel's video input connector and video output connector with the cable.
2. Set menu switch No. 620 <DUBBING LOOP> to activate the dubbing loop function.
Complate
Error
ClearError Out Entry
Device Type
Request
In Flag
Reset
Out Flag
Reset
In Flag
Recall
Out Flag
Recall
Rom
Version
Preroll
Play after
CueUp with Data
CTL Data
Reset
In Data
Preset
Out Data
Preset
OFF (0)
: The dubbing loop function is disabled.
Cassette
Out
Eject
Memory
Switch Sense
Full Ee Tape Remain
3 TIMES (1) : The dubbing loop function repeats 3 times.
5 TIMES (2) : The dubbing loop function repeats 5 times.
10 TIMES (3): The dubbing loop function repeats 10 times.
On
Ee off
Sense
Not Target
Valiable
Fwd
Valiable
Rev
Fwd
Shuttle
Rev
In Shift(+)
In Shift(-)
Clear
JVC-1 Table
Select
Basic Table
Select
• When the menu switch is set to any position except OFF (0), the Dubbing Loop mode is activated.
Shuttle
Status
Sense
TC Data
Sense
CTL Data
Sense
Timer Mode
Select
Analog Data
Select
3. While referring to the color bar on the monitor, adjust the video control parameters so that color changes in the
picture are minimized.
Out Shift(+) Go to In
Out Shift(-) Goto Out
Memory
4. To end the dubbing loop mode, set menu switch No. 620 <DUBBING LOOP> to “OFF (0)” and press the [SET]
button.Normal operation is restored.
ACK
NAK
Play
Rec
Rec Request
VTR Ind.
Memory
Search
Ff
Rec Pause Panel Switch
Sense
Rew
Panel Switch
Set
Memory
JVC Status
Sense
Switch Preset
Stop
Still
122
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-2 RS-232C Commands
13-2 RS-232C Commands
Ⅲ Return command from the VCR
Ⅲ Auxiliary commands to the VCR
40: Enter Basic/JVC-1 Table
If this command is transmitted during data trans-
mission, data transmitted after this command will
be zero (=30) or space (=20). More information
on how to use this command can be found in the
descriptions of related commands where its use is
valid.
Ⅲ Receiving
Ⅲ RS-232C specifications
01: Completion
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• The VCR always receives commands from the
controller. The VCR also replies to all “sense”
commands such as StatusSense/TimeSense.
• Switch Remote/Local on this unit to “Remote”.
9PIN D-SUB
The VCR outputs this command after completing
the requested operation (CueUp With Data/Preroll/
AutoEdit, etc.).
1
5
6
9
02: Error
Basic/JVC-1 Table
The VCR outputs this command when invalid data
is received.Bit-0 (Error) of the first byte is set for
[D7: StatusSense].
In this condition, the VCR will not accept any
command except the StatusSense command.
The Error mode can be released with [41:
ClearError] or [56: Clear].
To cancel the entire command, use [56: Clear]. To
cancel only the most recently transmitted data,
use [41: ClearError].
Ⅲ Time management
PIN No. Signal Operation
Direction
Command output timing is managed as follows:
• The minimum command interval is 10 ms.
• The minimum byte interval is 100 µs when the
controller outputs the next byte without confirming
the [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] returned from the
VCR.
2
3
4
5
6
RxD Reception data
TxD
VCR p CPU
41: Clear Error
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Transmission data VCR [ CPU
In the Error mode, this command cancels the last
numeric/data command.
The Error mode is engaged when bit-0 (Error) of
the first byte in D7: StatusSense is “1”.
DTR Data terminal ready VCR [ CPU
GND Signal ground
DSR Data set ready
VCR p CPU
56: Clear
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Note: CPU means a controller such as a personal
computer.
Ⅲ Processing method when an error occurs
(1) When NAK (0B) is returned
In the Error mode, this command releases the
command.
The first byte command that the VCR was unable
to receive is sent. Output another command.
(2) When Error (02) is returned <The Error section of
StatusSense (bit-0 of the first byte) describes the
Error mode.>
Mode
: Non-synchronized
03: Cassette Out
Basic/JVC-1 Table
TxD 56
RxD
Character length : 8 bits
0A
The VCR outputs this command when the eject
operation is complete.
Parity check
Start bit
: None
: 1
The Error mode is engaged when bit-0 (Error) of
the first byte in D7: StatusSense is “1”.
Stop bit
: 1
05: Not Target
Basic/JVC-1 Table
ASCII code
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• The VCR receives an illegal command for the
second byte and later. With ClearError [41],
the previous byte is canceled.
• When ClearError [41] is transmitted repeatedly
because Error [02] is returned more than once,
ACK [0A] is returned to release the Error mode.
The Error mode can also be released by
canceling the commands being input with Clear
[56].
Data rate
: 9600 bps
The VCR outputs this command when CueUp
With Data/Preroll operation cannot be completed
normally.
Alphanumeric equivalents for certain Preset
commands.
Bit construction
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
30: Zero
31: 1
32: 2
33: 3
34: 4
35: 5
36: 6
37: 7
38: 8
39: 9
61: a
62: b
63: c
64: d
65: e
66: f
67: g
68: h
69: i
6B: k
6C: l
6D: m
6E: n
6F: o
70: p
71: q
72: r
75: u
76: v
77: w
78: x
79: y
7A: z
20: Space
2D: -
Start bit
Ⅲ Basic format
(1) The VCR returns [0A: ACK]·[0B: NAK]·[02:Error]
in response to each byte sent from the controller.
Eg.: E5: EditPreset
Stop bit
0A: ACK
This command is returned when the defined
command is received.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
0B: NAK
Basic/JVC-1 Table
This command is returned when an undefined or
invalid command is received.
(3) If ACK [0A], NAK [0B], Error [02] or Data is not
returned
CPU E5
VTR
3*
3*
0A
0A
0A
The VCR does not recognize the byte. Cancel the
commands being input with Clear [56] and transmit
the command again.
(The VCR replies within 1 ms after receiving the
command from the controller.)
ASCII code
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Alphanumeric equivalents for certain “Sense”
commands.
CPU: Controller such as a personal computer
VCR: BR-D95 series
• In response to the first byte sent from the
controller, the VCR returns either [ACK], [NAK]
or [Error] within 100 µs.
• The controller confirms the reply from the VCR
and then outputs the second byte. The VCR
returns either [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] within
100 µs.
• The controller confirms the reply from the VCR
and then outputs the third byte. The VCR
returns either [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] within
100 µs.
73: s
74: t
6A: j
Ⅲ Corresponding commands
3A: Play key
30: Zero
31: 1
32: 2
33: 3
34: 4
35: 5
36: 6
37: 7
38: 8
39: 9
61: a
62: b
63: c
64: d
65: e
66: f
67: g
68: h
69: i
6B: k
6C: l
6D: m
6E: n
6F: o
70: p
71: q
72: r
75: u
76: v
77: w
78: x
79: y
7A: z
20: Space
2D: -
Basic/JVC-1 Table
(4) When NotTarget [05] is returned
The target point on the tape specified with
CueUpWith Data/Preroll does not exist. Input a
different value and try again.
Playback
TxD 3A
RxD
0A
3B: Fwd-4 Key
Basic Table
4x playback in the forward direction
TxD 3B
RxD
0A
3C: Fwd-0.09 Key
Basic Table
73: s
74: t
(2) When the data is recognized by the controller, the
VCR returns the standard byte data.
Eg.: D7: StatusSense
0.09x playback in the forward direction
6A: j
TxD 3C
RxD
0A
3D: Fwd Still Key
Still playback
Basic Table
Basic Table
CPU D7
VTR
** ** ** ** **
TxD 3D
RxD
CPU: Controller such as a personal computer
VCR: BR-D95 series
• The VCR starts to output data within 100 µs
after receiving the first byte from the controller.
Stop bits are inserted between output data.
0A
3E: Fwd-6 Key
6x playback in the forward direction
TxD 3E
RxD
0A
124
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-2 RS-232C Commands
13-2 RS-232C Commands
3F: Stop Key
Stop
Basic/JVC-1 Table
51: Out Entry
Registers the current time as OUT point.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
AB:FF Key
Fast-forwarding.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
72: ROM version
Returns the CPU (ROM)’s program version.
TxD 72
JVC-1 Table
TxD 3F
RxD
TxD 51
RxD
TxD AB
RxD
0A
0A
0A
RxD
21 03 **
42: CueUp With Data
Basic Table
52: In Flag Reset
Disables the registered IN point.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
AC: Rew Key
Rewinding.
• The first byte is fixed at 21.
• The second byte shows the type of software
(D9 = “03”).
• The third byte shows version information.
A0: Standby On Key
Execute CueUp to the desired point on the tape.
The same as B2: CueUpWithData.
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is
complete.
• When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
TxD 52
RxD
TxD AC
RxD
0A
0A
53: Out Flag Reset
Disables the registered OUT point.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
B2: CueUp With Data
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Executes CueUp to the desired point on the tape.
Same as 42: CueUpWithData. (Basic only)
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is
complete.
• When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
Standby On
TxD 53
RxD
TxD A0
RxD
0A
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
0A
TxD
RxD
42
54: In Flag Recall
Enables the disabled IN point.
TxD 54
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
A1: Standby Off Key
Standby Off
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
3*
TxD A1
RxD
RxD
0A
0A
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
0A
0A
0A
0A
01
55: Out Flag Recall
Enables the disabled OUT point.
TxD
RxD
B2
A2: Preroll Key
Rewinds the tape for the preroll time.
• The preroll time is specified by [E6: Preroll Time
Preset].
• When it is not specified, the VCR’s menu setting
is used.
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after preroll is
• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second
byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
TxD 55
RxD
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
3*
0A
58: Go-To In
Basic/JVC-1 Table
0A
0A
0A
0A
01
Executes CueUp to the point registered on the
tape with [50: In Entry] and [E3: In Data Preset].
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is
complete.
• When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second
byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second byte or later of
TxD. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
complete.
TxD A2
RxD
0A
01
A3: Eject Key
Eject
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• When the IN point is not registered, the VCR
returns [0B: NAK].
4A: Rev-1 Key
1x playback in the reverse direction
Basic Table
Basic Table
Basic Table
TxD A3
RxD
TxD 58
RxD
0A
03
0A
01
TxD 4A
RxD
• When the Eject operation is completed properly,
the VCR returns [03: Cassette Out].
A5: Variable Fwd Key
Variable playback in the forward direction.
Specify the speed with the second byte of TxD.
Refer to the speed/data correspondence table.
(See page 134.)
59: Go-To Out
Basic/JVC-1 Table
0A
Executes CueUp to the point registered on the
tape with [51: Out Entry] and [E4: Out Data Preset].
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is
complete.
• When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
4B: Rev-4 Key
4x playback in the reverse direction
Basic/JVC-1 Table
B2: Play after CueUp With Data
JVC-1 Table
TxD 4B
RxD
Executes CueUp and engages the Play mode.
The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is
complete.
When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
0A
4C: Rev-0.09 Key
0.09x playback in the reverse direction
• When the IN point is not registered, the VCR
returns [0B: NAK].
TxD A5
RxD
**
TxD 4C
RxD
0A
0A
0A
TxD 59
RxD
Auxiliary commands
• Clearing with [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError]
has no effect.
• [40: Enter] has no effect.
A6: Variable Rev Key
Variable playback in the reverse direction.
Specify the speed with the second byte of TxD.
Refer to the speed/data correspondence table.
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
4D: Rev Still Key
Still playback
TxD 4D
Basic Table
Basic Table
0A
01
TxD
RxD
B2
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
5A: Memory
Registers the current time as the Memory point.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
3*
RxD
0A
TxD 5A
RxD
Basic/JVC-1 Table
4E: Rev-6 Key
6x playback in the reverse direction
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
01
5B: Memory Search
Executes CueUp to the point registered on the
tape with [5A: Memory].
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is
complete.
• When the specified point is not on the tape, the
VCR returns [05: NotTarget].
• When the Memory point is not registered, the
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second
byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
TxD 4E
RxD
0A
TxD A6
RxD
**
4F: Still Key
Still playback
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Basic/JVC-1 Table
0A
0A
Auxiliary commands
• Clearing with [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError]
has no effect.
TxD 4F
RxD
0A
50: In Entry
Registers the current time as IN point.
• [40: Enter] has no effect.
VCR returns [0B: NAK].
TxD 5B
RXD
TxD 50
RxD
0A
01
0A
126
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-2 RS-232C Commands
13-2 RS-232C Commands
B5: Fwd Shuttle Key
Basic/JVC-1 Table
C0: Auto Edit Key
Basic Table
CA: Rec Key
Recording
Use with [FA: Rec Request].
TxD FA
RxD
Basic/JVC-1 Table
31: Audio-7 information
80: TimeCode-1 information
Shuttle search playback in the forward direction.
• Specify the Fwd Shuttle Mode. The speed is
specified by the second byte.
Executes Auto Edit on the VCR.
• The editing channel must be selected with [E5/
E9: Edit Preset].
81: TimeCode-2 information 79: TimeCode-3 information
77: TimeCode-4 information 78: TimeCode-5 information
82: OnScreen-1 information 83: OnScreen-2 information
CA
84: TBC information-1
86:TBC information-3
• Specify the adjustment speed.
• Use with [FA: Rec Request].
0A
0A
•
Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].
TxD B5
RxD
3*
• The third and fourth RxD bytes express indi-
vidual bit information (Data1/Data2) for the
specified address.
• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns
“02: Error”.
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
0A
0A
• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s
menu setting is used.
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Auto Edit
is complete.
CB: Rec Pause Key
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• The second TxD byte consists of numeric data
and is expressed with “30”, “31”, “32” ... “38”,
“39”, “3A”, “3B” and “3C”.
• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns
“02: Error”.
• The speeds corresponding to each value are
shown below.
Recording is paused.
Use with [FA: Rec Request].
TxD FA
RxD
CB
[0B: NAK] is returned to the player.
0A
0A
Auxiliary commands
TxD FA
RxD
C0
• When [02: Error] occurs, [56: Clear] is valid. All
commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
0A
0A
01
CE: Edit On Key
Basic Table
C1: Preview Key
Execute Preview on the VCR.
• The editing channel must be selected with [E5/
E9: Edit Preset].
• Use with [FA: Rec Request].
•
• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s
menu setting is used.
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Preview is
complete.
Basic Table
The channel selected with [E5: Edit Preset] is
engaged in the Edit mode.
Use with [FA: Rec Request].
Data
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Speed Still 0.03 0.09 0.20 0.50
1
2
4
6
TxD FA
RxD
CE
39 3A
0A
0A
D4: Tape Remain Sense
JVC-1 Table
10 17 or 32
Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].
Recalls remaining tape time information.
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
Data
3B
3C
CF: Edit Off Key
Basic Table
TxD
RxD
D4
Adjustment speed -10% +10%
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
[40: Enter] has no effect.
B6: Rev Shuttle Key
Shuttle search playback in the reverse direction.
Specify the Fwd Shuttle Mode. The speed is
specified by the second byte.
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
Stops the editing operation.
The VCR enters the Play mode after editing is
complete.
D6: Preroll Time Sense
Shows the preroll time setting.
Basic Table
[0B: NAK] is returned to the player.
TxD CF
RxD
0A
TxD FA
RxD
C1
The VCR returns the value set by [E6: Preroll Time
Preset] or the value set with the VCR’s menu.
0A
0A
01
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
C2: Review Key
Execute Review on the VCR.
• [C0: Auto Edit] must be complete.
• Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].
• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s
menu setting is used.
• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Review is
complete.
Basic Table
D1: Device Type Request
Returns the model name of the connected VCR.
TxD D1
JVC-1 Table
TxD
RxD
D6
3*
10S
3*
1S
RxD
**
** ** **
Basic/JVC-1 Table
D7: Status Sense
Shows the VCR status.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• Uses ASCII code to express “0” to “9”, “a” to “z”,
and “space”.
• For example, d = “64”, 9 = “39”, 5 = “35” and
space = “20” for the BR-D95.
TxD
RxD
D7
** ** ** ** **
Specify the adjustment speed.
• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit,
refer to “Sense command details”.
[0B: NAK] is returned to the player.
TxD B6
RxD
3*
D3: Memory SwitchSense
JVC-1 Table
0A
0A
TxD C2
RxD
D8: Current TC Sense
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Recalls menu switch content.
0A
01
• The second TxD byte consists of numeric data
and is expressed with “30”, “31”, “32” ... “38”,
“39”, “3A”, “3B” and “3C”.
• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns
“02: Error”.
• The speeds corresponding to each value are
shown below.
Shows the current TC time data.
TxD D3
RxD
**
0A
** **
C4: Full EE On
Checks VCR’s input signals.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
TxD
RxD
D8
• Refer to “Menu Switch setting” to find out more
about menu switch contents.
• Specify the address data you want to recall with
the second TxD byte.
The corresponding addresses are as follows.
01 :Servo/System-1 information 08:System-2 information
3*
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
TxD C4
RxD
0A
3*
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
C5: EE Off Basic/JVC-1 Table
Releases EE check.
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
Data 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
TxD C5
RxD
10:System-3 information
40:System-5 information
89:System-7 information
87:System-9 information
91:System-11 information
94:System-14 information
0a:Video information-2
0c :Video information-4
1b:Video-6 information
1e:Video-8 information
0f :Video-10 information
1d:Video-12 information
06:Audio-3 information
03:Audio-5 information
20:System-4 information
88:System-6 information
90:System-8 information
09 :System-10 information
92:System-12 information
D9: Current CTL Sense
Basic/JVC-1 Table
Speed Still 0.03 0.09 0.20 0.50
1
2
4
6
0A
Shows the current CTL time data.
39 3A
C8: Select EE On
Checks the input signals to the editing channel
selected by [E5/E9: Edit Preset].
Basic Table
TxD
RxD
D9
10 17 or 32
3*
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
Auxiliary commands
TxD C8
RxD
3*
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The
previous command (one byte) is cleared.
0b:Video information-3
0d:Video-5 information
0e:Video-7 information
1c :Video-9 information
1f :Video-11 information
05:Audio-2 information
07:Audio-4 information
30:Audio-6 information
0A
The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.
C9: EE Off Basic Table
Releases EE check.
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
• The most significant bit at 10H expresses
“minus”.
• [40: Enter] has no effect.
TxD C9
RxD
0A
128
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-2 RS-232C Commands
13-2 RS-232C Commands
E3: In Data Preset
Presets the IN point.
10H
Basic/JVC-1 Table
E6: Preroll TimePreset
Sets the preroll time.
The set value should be less than 59 seconds.
If the preroll time is not set with this command, use
the VCR’s menu switch setting.
Basic Table
DA: In Data Sense
Shows the set IN point.
Basic Table
DF: Current Sub UB Sense
Shows the current SUB TC UB data.
Basic Table
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
TxD
RxD
DF
TxD
RxD
E3
3*
TxD
RxD
DA
**
10H
**
1H
**
10M
**
1M
0A
0A
0A
0A
A
3*
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
F
3*
TxD E6
RxD
3*
3*
**
10S
**
1S
**
10F
**
1F
3*
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
• Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
Auxiliary commands
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX)
are expressed in ASCII code.
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
E0: TC Data Preset
Presets the TC data.
10H
Basic Table
DB: Out Data Sense
Basic Table
Shows the set OUT point.
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
TxD
RxD
DB
TxD
RxD
E0
3*
3*
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
E7: Timer Mode Select
Switches the current timer.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
3*
3*
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
TxD E7
RxD
3*
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
• Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
• Each bit is defined as follows:
Auxiliary commands
7
0
6
0
5
1
4
1
3
0
2
1
0
DB: Panel Switch Sence
JVC-1 Table
E4: Out Data Preset
Presets the OUT point.
10H
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
First byte
UB CTL TC
Shows the various settings on the front panel.
• CTL = 32, LTC = 31, LTC UB = 35
Auxiliary commands
TxD
RxD
DB
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
3*
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
**
**
**
**
TxD
RxD
E4
3*
DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3
0A
0A
0A
0A
A
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
F
3*
• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit,
refer to “EC:Panel Switch Preset”.
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
0A
0A
0A
0A
DC: Current TC UB Sense
Basic Table
• Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
Shows the current TC UB data.
E1: TC UB Data Preset
Basic Table
TxD
RxD
DC
E8: Analog Data Set
Sets values for specified audio and video settings.
JVC-1 Table
Presets the TC UB data.
**
10H
**
1H
**
10M
**
1M
10H
1H
**
10M
**
1M
**
TxD
RxD
E1
**
TxD
RxD
E8
**
**
**
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
**
10S
**
1S
**
10F
**
1F
0A
0A
0A
0A
10S
**
1S
**
10F
**
1F
**
• Selects the setting item and sets the data as
shown below with the input values for the
second TxD byte or later.
The second byte: Selects the setting item (DATA0)
The third/fourth byte: Sets the data (DATA1, DATA2)
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX)
are expressed in ASCII code.
0A
0A
0A
0A
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX)
are expressed in ASCII code.
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
DD: JVC Status Sense
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
Shows the VCR status.
TxD DD
RxD
A/V Setting items
DATA0 DATA1 DATA2
**
** ** **
Tracking volume
20
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
00-FF
00-C0
00-C0
00-FF
00-FF
00-FF
03-0D
03-0D
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E5: Edit Preset
Basic Table
• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit,
refer to “Sense command details”.
Output video level
Output chroma level
Output video H phase
Output setup level
Output chroma phase
Output video V phase
Output system phase
Output SC phase
Selects the edit mode.
TxD E5
RxD
3*
3*
DE: Current Sub Tc Sense
Basic Table
0A
0A
0A
Shows the current SUB-TC time data.
•
Each bit is defined as follows:
TxD
RxD
DE
• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. Whatever has not yet been specified is
regarded as [30: Zero].
7
0
0
6
0
0
5 4 3
2
1
0
3*
10H
3*
1H
3*
10M
3*
1M
First byte
1 1 0 INS ASM Video
1 1 0 TC Aud2 Aud1
3*
10S
3*
1S
3*
10F
3*
1F
Second byte
E2: Counter Reset
Basic JVC-1 Table
Low-order High-order 0000-011F
00-FF
Low-order High-order 20FE-D002
Auxiliary commands
Resets the CTL counter.
Output SCH phase
Output audio phase
—
• Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are
expressed in ASCII code.
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
TxD E2
RxD
40
0A
0A
Auxiliary commands
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte. All
commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
• [56: Clear] is valid when [02: Error] occurs. All
commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
• [40: Enter] is required for the second TxD byte.
130
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-2 RS-232C Commands
13-2 RS-232C Commands
F6: JVC Table-1 On
Use the JVC Table-1 commands.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
ED: Memory Switch Preset
Rewrites the contents of the menu switch.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
E9: Edit Preset 2
Selects the Edit mode for 4 channels.
Basic Table
Fifth byte (DATA3)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TxD F6
RxD
TxD
RxD
ED
**
**
**
TxD
RxD
E9
3*
3*
3*
IS
IS
IS
IS
MON CF
CF
PB
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
CH2 1 CH2 0 CH1 1 CH1 0 /IPT
SW FLD /EE
F7: Basic Table On
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• Refer to “Menu Switch Setting” to find out more
about menu switch contents.
• The setting of the menu switch changed with
this command is reset to the default setting
when the VCR is turned OFF.
• Each bit is defined as follows:
Use the Basic Table commands.
JVC Table-1 is set to OFF.
TxD F7
VIDEO INPUT SELECT
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
3
0
0
2
INS
TC
1
0
Bit name
Setting
First byte
Second byte
Third byte
ASM Video
Aud2 Aud1
DA2 DA1
VID GEN
DIG VID LINE
RxD
0A
DA4 DA3
CPN
LINE
SIF
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
FA: Rec/DubRequest
Basic/JVC-1 Table
• The second byte expresses the address
(Data0).
Auxiliary commands
Send this command before sending commands
such as [CA: REC], [CB: RECPause].
TxD FA
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or
later. All commands back to the first byte are
cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is
valid. The previous command (one byte) is
cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
EB: TC Switch Preset
Switches the time code generator function.
1
—
—
Internal
—
The corresponding addresses are as follows.
RxD
0A
01 :Servo/System-1 information
10 :System-3 information
40 :System-5 information
89 :System-7 information
87 :System-9 information
91 :System-11 information
94 :System-14 information
0a :Video information-2
0c :Video information-4
1b :Video-6 information
1e :Video-8 information
0f :Video-10 information
1d :Video-12 information
06 :Audio-3 information
03 :Audio-5 information
31 :Audio-7 information
81 :TimeCode-2 information
77 :TimeCode-4 information
82 :OnScreen-1 information
84 :TBC information-1
08:System-2 information
20:System-4 information
88:System-6 information
90:System-8 information
09 :System-10 information
92:System-12 information
AUDIO INPUT SELECT
• The recording standby mode is maintained until
the REC or STOP command or Error release
command is transmitted.
Bit name
Setting
IS**1
IS**2
ANA
0
0
1
1
0
1
Basic Table
AES/EBU
SDI
FB: VTR IND
Checks that a VCR is connected.
Basic/JVC-1 Table
—
1
0b:Video information-3
0d:Video-5 information
0e:Video-7 information
1c :Video-9 information
1f :Video-11 information
05:Audio-2 information
07:Audio-4 information
30:Audio-6 information
80:TimeCode-1 information
79 : TimeCode-3 information
78:TimeCode-5 information
83 :OnScreen-2 information
86:TBC information-3
TxD EB
RxD
3*
TxD FB
RxD
Internal
0A
0A
AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO
0A
•
Each bit is defined as follows:
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT MONITOR
7
6
0
5
1
4
1
3
0
2
1
0
Bit name
Bit name
Setting
Setting
The first byte 0
REC RUN REGEN EXT
MS**L
MS**R
MON/IPT
• REC RUN : 1: Rec Run 0: Free Run
OFF
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
MONITOR
INPUT
0
1
REGEN
EXT
: 1: Regene 0: Preset
: 1: Ext 0: Int
R CH
L CH
Auxiliary commands
L+R CH
• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later.
All commands back to the first byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
CF ON/OFF SW
COUNTER
Setting
Bit name
Bit name
• The third and fourth bytes express individual bit
information for the specified address. These are
expressed as Data1/Data2 information.
• The rewritten data can be checked with D3:
MemorySwitchSense. The D3 command
applies only to JVC Table-1.
Setting
UB
TC
0
CF SW
CTL
TC
0
CF OFF
CF ON
0
1
EC: Panel Switch Preset
Switches various settings on the front panel.
JVC-1 Table
—
1
1
UB
0
TxD EC
RxD
**
**
**
**
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
PB PB/EE
Setting
CF 4/8 SW
Setting
• Settings are defined with the input values for the
second TxD byte or later. The bit assignment is
shown below.
Bit name
Bit name
Auxiliary commands
PB/EE
• When [02: Error] occurs, [56: Clear] is valid. All
commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.
• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid.
The previous command (one byte) is cleared.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
CF FLD
PB/EE
PB
0
1
4 FIELD
8 FIELD
0
1
Second byte (DATA0)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8 FIELD: (625) only
REMOTE
Setting
MS
MS
MS
MS
VID DIG LINE
GEN VID
CH4 L CH4 R CH3 L CH3 R
Bit name
Rem/9pin
Third byte (DATA1)
REMOTE
LOCAL
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
3
2
1
0
MS
MS
MS
MS
UB
TC
Auxiliary commands
• [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError] are invalid.
• [40: Enter] is invalid.
CH2 L CH2 R CH1 L CH1 R
Fourth byte (DATA2)
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
IS
IS
IS
IS
Rem
/9pin
CH4 1 CH4 0 CH3 1 CH3 0
132
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-3 Speed/data correspondence table
13-4 Contents of the sense commands
Bit-2 DEW
Bit-1 Tape Begin
Condensation.
The tape winding start sensor
is detected.
The tape winding end sensor
is detected.
The bit assignment for each status data byte returned
with D7: Status Sense is as follows:
Status (No. 1): First byte
Data
00-1D
1E-2C 0.03
2D-3A 0.07
3B-44
45-4B
4C-50
51-56
57-59
5A-5C 0.27
5B-60
61
62
63
64
65
66-68
69
6A
Speed
STILL
Data
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
Speed
1.00
1.04
1.07
1.11
1.15
1.20
1.24
1.30
1.33
1.38
1.43
1.49
1.54
1.60
1.65
1.72
1.78
1.84
2.00
2.13
2.21
2.29
2.37
2.46
2.55
2.64
2.74
2.84
Data
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0-C1 10.00
C2 10.70
C3-C4 11.10
C5
C6
C7-C8 13.00
C9-CA 14.00
CB-CC 15.00
Speed
7.50
7.80
8.00
8.40
8.70
9.00
9.30
9.70
Bit-0 Tape End
Bit
Status
Remarks
Bit-7 Undefined
Bit-6 Undefined
Always “1”
Always “0”
0.10
0.13
0.17
0.20
0.23
Status (No. 3) Third byte
Bit-5 Short FF/REW Short FF: Detects the beginning
of the tape and fast-forwards
the tape until Stand-By On is
engaged.
Bit
Status
Remarks
Bit-7 Unused
Bit-8 Unused
Bit-6 Unused
Bit-5 Unused
Bit-4 Unused
Bit-3 Unused
Bit-2 Unused
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
88
89
Short REW: Detects tape end
and rewinds the tape until
Stand-By On is engaged.
0.30
0.33
0.34
035
0.37
0.38
0.40
0.44
0.45
0.47
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92-94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
Bit-4 REC Inhibit
Indicates that a cassette with
no safety tab has been loaded
or that recording prohibition
has been selected with the
VCR’s memory switch.
11.50
12.40
Bit-1 Search mode During CueUp/Preroll (only
when controlled from the RS-
232C)
Bit-3 Cassette Out
Bit-2 Servo Lock
No tape is loaded in the VCR.
CD
16.00
Bit-0 Unused
Always “0”
During tape playback, both the
capstan and drum servo are
locked.
CE-CF 17.00
D0-D1 18.00
D2
D3
6B
Status (No. 4) Forth byte
Bit-1 Undefined
Bit-0 Error
Always “0”
6C-6E 0.50
19.00
20.00
Bit
Status
Remarks
Playback
Fast-forward
Rewind
Shows that an invalid command
has been received. In this status,
a continuously transmitted
command will not be accepted.
To release the Error mode,
cancel the commands one byte
at a time with 41: Error Clear. Or
cancel all commands with 56:
Clear.
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
0.54
0.56
0.58
0.60
0.63
0.65
0.67
0.70
0.72
0.75
0.78
0.80
0.84
0.87
0.90
0.93
0.97
Bit-7 Play Mode
Bit-6 FF Mode
Bit-5 REW mode
Bit-4 Stop mode
Bit-3 Stand-by mode Standby-Off
Bit-2 Eject
D4-D5 21.00
D6
D7
D8
D9
22.00
23.00
24.00
25.00
Stop
Tape is ejected
Record
Always “0”
DA-DB 26.00
Bit-1 REC mode
Bit-0 Unused
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
27.00
28.00
29.00
31.00
32.00
33.00
34.00
35.00
37.00
38.00
39.00
41.00
42.00
44.00
45.00
47.00
49.00
50.00
52.00
54.00
56.00
58.00
9E-A0 3.00
Status (No. 2) Second byte
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
3.30
3.40
3.50
3.70
3.80
Status (No. 5) Fifth byte
Bit
Status
Remarks
Bit
Status
Remarks
Pause
Always “0”
During Shuttle/Jog/Variable
search in the forward direction
Bit-7 EE
Externally input video signals
are output.
Bit-7 Pause mode
Bit-6 Unused
Bit-5 Shuttle Fwd
Bit-6 A1 EE Mode
Bit-5 Video Mute
Externally input audio (A1)
signals are output.
Video signals are muted
(returned from the DS micro-
processor).
A6-A8 4.00
A9
AA
AB
4.40
4.50
4.70
Bit-4 Shuttle Rev
During Shuttle/Jog/Variable
search in the reverse direction
Bit-4 Audio Mute
Bit-3 Warning
Audio signals are muted
(returned from the AUDIO
microprocessor.).
Shows that the VCR is in the
Auto-Off mode.
Bit-3 Speed Code-3 Refer to the table below.
Bit-2 Speed Code-2 Refer to the table below.
Bit-1 Speed Code-1 Refer to the table below.
Bit-0 Speed Code-0 Refer to the table below.
AC-AE 5.00
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
5.40
5.60
5.80
6.00
6.30
6.50
6.70
7.00
7.20
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
0
SPD 0.03 SPD 0.1 SPD 0.2 SPD 0.5 SPD 1.0 SPD 2.0 SPD 4.0 SPD 6.0 SPD 10 SPD 17 SPD 32 SPD
0.03
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
10
17
32
Speed Code-3
Speed Code-2
Speed Code-1
Speed Code-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
F1-FF
134
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-4 Contents of the sense commands
13-5 Menu switch setting information
The set value expresses the corresponding bit value.
2 bits or more are expressed as follows:
The bit assignment for status data each byte returned
with DD: JVC Status Sense is as follows:
JVC Status (No. 1) First byte
JVC Status (No. 4) Forth byte
SYSTEM information-3
DATA0 10
Bit
Status
Remarks
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1
D2 328
307 307 307
Bit-7 TBC board
The TBC board is installed.
Always “1”
0
1
2
3
4
5
:
0
1
Bit
Status
Remarks
311 314
Corresponding menu switches
Bit-7 Undefined
Bit-6 Undefined
Bit-5 Unused
Bit-4 Unused
Bit-3 Unused
Bit-2 Unused
Bit-1 JVC Table 1
Bit-0 Local
Always “1”
Bit-6 TC board
The TC board is installed.
Always “1”
10
11
100
101
:
Always “0”
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
Always “0”
Bit-5 DA3 Ins Lamp Audio-3 Insert editing mode
is selected.
307 PAUSE/STILL/STP
TIME
1 SEC
10 SEC
30 SEC
1 MIN
2 MIN
3 MIN
4 MIN
5 MIN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Always “0”
Bit-4 DA4 Ins Lamp Audio-4 Insert editing mode
is selected.
Always “0”
Always “0”
SERVO information/SYSTEM information-1
DATA0 01
Bit-3 Auto mode
Auto Edit/Preview/Review
being executed.
JVC Table-1 is selected.
“Local” is selected.
7
D1 005
D2
6
5
4
3
2
002
1
0
Bit-2 Unused
Bit-1 Unused
Bit-0 Unused
Always “0”
Always “0”
Always “0”
311 AUTO PLAY AT
TAPE BEGIN
OFF
0
1
0
1
0
1
003 003
ON
JVC Status (No. 2) Second byte
314 PB/EE MODE
STOP/FF/REW
STOP
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
Bit
Status
Remarks
Setting
OFF
ON
Set value
Bit-7 Generator
The TC generator is selected
for the current timer mode.
328 EDIT POINT CLEAR
DISABLE
ENABLE
002 OPERATION LOCK
0
1
1
3
0
1
Bit-6 UB
UB is selected for the current
timer mode.
003 SYNC SELECT
EXT
AUTO
OFF
ON
SYSTEM information-4
DATA0 20
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit-5 TC
TC is selected for the current
timer mode.
D1 317 317
D2 323
005 AUTO TRACKING
320 320 320 320
Bit-4 CTL
CTL is selected for the
current timer mode.
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
317 9PIN DEVICE ID JVC D80
Set value
0
SYSTEM information-2
DATA0 08
Bit-3 CTL
Interpolation
CTL
Interpolation
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
JVC D860/D92/D95
1
2
Bit-2 DF
DF is selected for the current
timer mode.
D1
D2
312
302 301 300
D95
DVW-A500
USE SETTING (382–385)
3
Bit-1 LTC
Bit-0 Unused
LTC is selected for the
current timer mode.
320 PREROLL TIME
0SEC
0
Corresponding menu switches
:
:
No. Menu switch name
D95 525/625
Setting
Set value
Always “0”
15SEC
STANDBY-ON
STILL
15
0
525
625
OFF
ON
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
323 PREROLL END
MODE
JVC Status (No. 3) Third byte
1
300 DIRECT EJECT
301 DIRECT SEARCH
302 BACK SPACE
Bit
Status
Remarks
SYSTEM information-5
DATA0 40
Bit-7 REC Run
TC setting is 1: REC Run 0:
Free Run.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OFF
ON
D1
391
395
D2 390 390 390 390
393 393
Bit-6 Regen
TC setting is 1: Regen 0:
Preset.
OFF
ON
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
390 SWAP VTR SELECT
Setting
AUTO
Set value
Bit-5 Ext
TC setting is 1: Ext 0: Int
312 AUTO REW AT
TAPE END
OFF
ON
0
:
9
Bit-4 TC Ins Lamp
TC Insert editing mode is
selected.
:
TYPE-9
Bit-3 DA1 Ins Lamp Audio-1 Insert editing mode
is selected.
391 SYNCRONIZATION
393 SYNC GRADE
DISABLE
ENABLE
ACCURATE
+/-1FRAME
+/-2FRAME
ROUGH
RECORDER
ONLY
AUTO-EE
0
1
0
1
2
3
Bit-2 DA2 Ins Lamp Audio-2 Insert editing mode
is selected.
Bit-1 V Ins Lamp
Video Insert editing mode is
selected.
395 AUTO-EE
0
1
Bit-0 Assem Lamp
Assemble editing mode is
selected.
136
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-5 Menu switch setting information
13-5 Menu switch setting information
SYSTEM information-6
DATA0 88
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
340 SEARCH SPEED
SYSTEM information-12
DATA0 94
VIDEO information-2
DATA0 0A
Setting
X32
Set value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
D1
D2 351 351
319 319
351
D1 387
D2 387 387p 387p 352
009 008p 008p 008 008
D1
120 111 119 112 112 111
111
X17
D2 104 104
X6
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
367 EDIT
OFF
Setting
Set value
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
(525)
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
104 CPN LEVEL/SETUP LOW/ON
INTERRUPTION
ON
319 FF/REW MAX SPEED X60
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
Set value
Set value
368 STARTING PIC
FREEZE
OFF
X32
X17
008 CAP LOCK (525)
SWSEL
2FLD
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
5
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
ON
(525)
HIGH/ON
369 PARA-RUN
OFF
351 PREREAD
VID OFF/AUD OFF
VID ON/AUD OFF
VID OFF/AUD ON
VID ON/AUD ON
4FLD
LOW/OFF
HIGH/OFF
ON
008p CAP LOCK (625)
SWSEL
2FLD
371 INPUT SELECT
SAFETY
OFF
111 VD REC SIGNAL SEL. COLOR BAR
BLACK
ON
4FLD
372 P+R AT SWAP MODE
ENABLE
DISABLE
OFF
8FLD
MULTI BURST
SYSTEM information-7
DATA0 89
009 CAP RE-LOCKING DIR. ACCELERATION
DECELERATION
PULSE& BAR
373 MATCH FRAME
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
112 ECC MODE
NORMAL
ON
D1
D2 359 359 359
352 AUD PREREAD
TIMING
NORMAL
OFFSET
4FLD
NO CONCEAL
NO CORRECTION
FRAME
374 MENU OPEN SAFETY
381 JOG FEELING
OFF
357
ON
387 CF FLAG REPLY
(525)
119 SLOW PICTURE
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
NORMAL
INSENSITIVE
DISABLE
ENABLE
2FLD OR 4FLD
OFF
FIELD
Setting
OFF
Set value
120 NO CTL MUTING OFF
ON
357 DIAG AT POWER ON
0
1
386 MUTING AT NO TAPE
387p CF FLAG REPLY
(625)
8FLD
4FLD OR 8FLD
0
1
ON
359 JOG FEELING
(REMOTE)
TYPE-1
TYPE-2
TYPE-3
TYPE-4
TYPE-5
0
1
2
3
4
2FLD OR 4FLD
OR 8FLD
2
SYSTEM information-11
DATA0 91
VIDEO information-3
DATA0 0B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OFF
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1 378 378 377 377 376 376 375 375
D2
D1 139 139 139 139
138 138
SYSTEM information-14
DATA0 92
SYSTEM information-8
DATA0 90
D2 140 140 140 140 140 140 139 139
Corresponding menu switches
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Corresponding menu switches
D1
D2
375 AUDIO EDIT
PRESET
D1 383 383 383 383 382 382 382 382
D2 385 385 385 385 384 384 384 384
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
363 363 363
NO DEFINITION
CH1
0
1
2
3
CH1
138 EXTRA LINE REC
(525)
FIX
0
1
2
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
363 CONTROLLER
SELECT
CH2
USER (COLOR)
USER (MONO)
Setting
Set value
Corresponding menu switches
CH1 OR CH2
DEFAULT
RM-450
CMX AEGIS
:
0
1
2
:
No. Menu switch name
382 9 PIN ID (1ST)
Setting
Set value
376 AUDIO EDIT
PRESET
139 EXTRA-L R1 SEL
(525)
10
11
:
00
01
:
0
:
F
0
:
15
NO DEFINITION
CH1
0
1
2
3
CH2
22
273
:
12
18
:
CH2
383 9 PIN ID (2ND)
384 9 PIN ID (3RD)
385 9 PIN ID (4TH)
0
:
F
0
:
15
NOT DEFINED
7
CH1 OR CH2
377 AUDIO EDIT
PRESET
284
29
NO DEFINITION
CH1
0
1
2
3
SYSTEM information-10
DATA0 09
0
:
F
0
:
15
140 EXTRA-L R2 SEL
(525)
10
11
:
00
01
:
CH3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CH2
D1 374 373 372 371
D2 386 381
369 368 367
340 340
0
:
F
0
:
15
22
273
:
12
18
:
CH1 OR CH2
378 AUDIO EDIT
PRESET
NO DEFINITION
CH1
0
1
2
3
284
29
CH4
CH2
CH1 OR CH2
138
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-5 Menu switch setting information
13-5 Menu switch setting information
VIDEO information-8
DATA0 1E
VIDEO information-10
DATA0 0F
VIDEO information-4
DATA0 0C
VIDEO information-6
DATA0 1B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1 144 144 144 144
D2 145 145 145 145 145 145 144 144
143 143
D1
D2
141p 141p 141p 141p141p 141p
142p 142p 142p 142p142p 142p
D1 139p139p 139p 139p
D2 140p140p 140p 140p 140p 140p139p 139p
138p 138p
D1
D2
146 146 146 146 146 146
147 147 147 147 147 147
Corresponding menu switches
Corresponding menu switches
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
Set value
No. Menu switch name Setting
138p EXTRA LINE REC FIX
Set value
141p EXTRA-L R3 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
146 EXTRA-L P3 SEL
(525)
00
:
00
:
12
18
:
143 EXTRA LINE PB
(525)
MUTING
0
1
0
1
2
AUTO
(625)
USER (COLOR)
22
319
:
335
623
12
273
:
USER SETTING
3
USER (MONO)
144 EXTRA- L P1SEL
(525)
10
:
0
139p EXTRA- LR1 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
34
35
284
29
:
22
319
:
335
623
147 EXTRA-L P4 SEL
(525)
00
:
00
:
12
18
:
22
273
:
12
18
:
142p EXTRA-L R4 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
12
273
:
34
35
22
319
:
335
623
284
10
:
29
0
140p EXTRA- LR2 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
284
29
145 EXTRA- L P2SEL
(525)
34
35
:
22
319
:
335
623
VIDEO information-11
DATA0 1F
22
273
:
12
18
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VIDEO information-9
DATA0 1C
34
35
D1
D2
146p 146p 146p 146p146p 146p
147p 147p 147p 147p147p 147p
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
284
29
D1 144p144p 144p 144p
D2 145p145p 145p 145p 145p 145p144p 144p
143p 143p
VIDEO information-7
DATA0 0E
Corresponding menu switches
VIDEO information-5
DATA0 0D
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Corresponding menu switches
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
146p EXTRA-L P3 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
D1
D2
141 141 141 141 141 141
142 142 142 142 142 142
D1
D2
130
128
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
149 149 148 148 124
133
143p EXTRA LINE PB
(625)
MUTING
AUTO
0
1
3
22
319
:
335
623
Corresponding menu switches
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
USER SETTING
Set value
34
35
141 EXTRA-L R3 SEL
(525)
11
:
01
:
12
18
:
144p EXTRA-L P1 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
124 CHROMA ROTE
CPS
CPN
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
147p EXTRA-L P4 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
22
273
:
22
319
:
335
623
128 PB EXTENSION LINE OFF
ON
22
319
:
335
623
284
29
34
35
130 H BLANKING WIDTH WIDE
142 EXTRA-L R4 SEL
(525)
11
:
01
:
12
18
:
NARROW
34
35
145p EXTRA-L P2 SEL
(625)
6
:
00
:
16
18
:
133 LINE SETUP (525) OFF
ON
22
273
:
22
319
:
335
623
148 IN VBLANK
YCOMB (525)
OFF
284
29
ON
34
35
OFF WITH21
149 VIDEO OUT SELECT NORMAL
SYNC DELAY
AROLL
140
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
13 RS-232C protocol
13-5 Menu switch setting information
13-5 Menu switch setting information
VIDEO information-12
DATA0 1D
AUDIO information-5
DATA0 03
236 PRO 48K S.R.CONV. AUTO
ON
0
1
0
1
0
1
403 REGEN MODE
TC&UB
TC
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
237 EMBEDDED AUDIO
OFF
UB
D1
D2
D1
D2 251 251
ON
148p
410 AUTO REGEN MODE ASM&INS
248 247
261 AUD SEL AT SEARCH
LINEAR TRACK
DIGITAL TRACK
ASM
INS
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
Set value
Set value
OFF
148p IN VBLANK
YCOMB (625)
OFF
ON
0
1
247 DIG AUD AT
ASYNC IN
NORMAL
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
AUDIO information-4
DATA0 07
NOISE REDUCE
TIME CODE information-2
DATA0 81
248 AUD DIG I/F
MUTING
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AUDIO information-2
DATA0 05
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1 227 227 226 226 225 225 224 224
D2 231 231 230 230 229 229 228 228
D1
D2
409
251 CH3/4 SOURCE SEL. CH3
CH3
p
SW/CH4
pSW
7
D1 214
D2 221
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
p
CH1/CH4
p
SW
214
219 219 215 216
Corresponding menu switches
CH3
p
p
SW/CH4
p
CH2
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name
224 AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH1
Setting
-6DB
0DB
Set value
CH3
CH1/CH4
p
CH2
2
No. Menu switch name
409 EXT REGEN
Setting
Set value
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
LTC
0
1
Set value
AUDIO information-6
DATA0 30
VITC
4DB
214 PB V.FADE
OFF
5M
0
1
2
0
1
-20DB
-6DB
0DB
7
6
5
4
3
1
0
TIME CODE information-3
DATA0 79
D1 257 256 255 254 253
D2
225 AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH2
10M
215 AUD REC VOLUME CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
7
D1 451
D2
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4DB
MODE1
MAS-1 BAL-2
/MAS-3 BAL-4
457
452 451 450
Corresponding menu switches
No. Menu switch name Setting
253 CH1 REC SIGNAL SILENCE
-20DB
-6DB
0DB
Set value
216 AUD PB VOLUME CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
0
1
226 AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Corresponding menu switches
MODE1
MAS-1 BAL-2
/MAS-3 BAL-4
SEL.
254 CH2 REC SIGNAL SILENCE
SEL. 1 kHz SINE
255 CH3 REC SIGNAL SILENCE
SEL. 1 kHz SINE
256 CH4 REC SIGNAL SILENCE
SEL. 1 kHz SINE
257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL -20 dB
LEV. -18 dB
1 kHz SINE
No. Menu switch name
450 SUB TC (VITC) REC OFF
ON
Setting
Set value
4DB
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
219 SEARCH REC CH CH1/CH2
CH3/CH4
0
1
2
0
1
-20DB
-6DB
0DB
227 AUDIO IN LEVEL
CH4
451 VITC OUT SELECT
SUB TC
TC
CH1+3/CH2+4
221 SEARCH PB AT
1+3/2+4
MUTING OFF
MUTING ON
4DB
OFF
OFF
ON
-20DB
-6DB
0DB
452 SEARCH LTC
228 AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH1
AUDIO information-3
DATA0 06
457 UB PRESET AUTO
OFF
ON
4DB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
229 AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH2
-6DB
0DB
D1 233 233 232 232 261 223 222 222
D2 237 236
TIME CODE information-1
DATA0 80
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4DB
Corresponding menu switches
D1 401 401 401 401 400 400 400 400
D2 410 410
230 AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH3
-6DB
0DB
403 403 402 402
No. Menu switch name
222 MONITOR MIX
MODE
Setting
Set value
AVERAGE
RMS
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
4DB
Corresponding menu switches
231 AUDIO OUT LEVEL
CH4
-6DB
0DB
No. Menu switch name
400 VITC LINE-1 SELECT
(525)
Setting
10
Set value
ADDITION
MUTING
CH1/2
-6DB
0
:
223 CH3/4 OUT SEL
AT 2CH
4DB
:
20
10
0
232 AUDIO MON LEVEL
LCH
401 VITC LINE-2 SELECT
(525)
10
0DB
:
:
4DB
20
10
0
233 AUDIO MON LEVEL
RCH
-6DB
402 CTL DF SELECT
(525)
TCG SETTING
NON DROP
DROP
0DB
1
4DB
2
142
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13 RS-232C protocol
14 TROUBLESHOOTING
13-5 Menu switch setting information
14-1 WARNINGS WITH INDICATORS
This machine features self-diagnostic circuitry which allows it to detect and report any malfunctions that may
occur. When a malfunction is detected, the cause will be shown on the monitor display and on the VCR’s counter
display. The warning code system consists of a main code (the code number) and a sub code (verbal descrip-
tion), e.g. 02 1 CONDENSATION ON DRUM. The front panel [AUTO OFF] indicator will normally be illuminated.
TIME CODE information-4
DATA0 77
ON SCREEN information-2
DATA0 83
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1 504 504 513 512 504
D2
D1 401p 401p 401p 401p 400p 400p 400p 400p
D2
* When the [AUTO OFF] indicator is illuminated, the unit is no longer operable. The [AUTO OFF] indicator can be
canceled by turning the power off and on again. If the indicator remains lit even after turning the power off and
on, malfunctions are possible. Consult your local JVC dealer.
Corresponding menu switches
Corresponding menu switches
←
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
No. Menu switch name
504 INFORMATION
SELECT
Setting
TIME
Set value
400p VITC LINE-1 SEL
(625)
7
:
22
0
:
15
0
1
3
4
Warning messages on
the on-screen display
Warning messages on
the counter display
TIME + MODE
TIME + SUBTC
CONDITION
AUTO OFF
401p VITC LINE-2 SEL
(625)
7
:
22
0
:
15
TIME + SUBTC
+ MODE
WARNING 01 1
LAMP FAILURE
H
M
S
F
512 MUTING/ALARM
MESSAGE
OFF
ON
0
1
0
1
Sub code
Main code
TIME CODE information-5
DATA0 78
513 EDIT ON SCREEN
OFF
ON
As this unit uses a microcomputer, it may not
function correctly due to noise from outside or
interference noise. In this case, unplug the power
cord and plug it again. Then, check the operation.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1
D2
421 421
TBC information-1
DATA0 84
Corresponding menu switches
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No. Menu switch name
421 TCG CF FLAG
Setting
Set value
D1
D2 620 620
Warning
code
On-screen display
Warning code information Behavior and actions to be taken
OFF
ON
0
1
2
0A
FAN FAILURE
The power turns OFF after
about 9 minutes.
Turn the [POWER] switch OFF. Wait for at
least 5 minutes, then turn the power ON
again.
Corresponding menu switches
AUTO
No. Menu switch name
620 DUBBING LOOP
Setting
OFF
Set value
0
1
2
3
ON SCREEN information-1
DATA0 82
If the warning indication is displayed again,
consult your local JVC dealer.
3TIMES
5TIMES
10TIMES
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1 502 502 502 502 501 501 501 501
D2 505
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
01
1
LAMP FAILURE
Tape sensor LED broken.
Condensation on drums.
(AUTO OFF)
Corresponding menu switches
TBC information-3
DATA0 86
Behavior: Cassette ejected and drum begins
to rotate. When condensation is
02
1
CONDENSATION ON
DRUM
No. Menu switch name
Setting
Set value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
501 CHARA H POSITION
0
0
:
eliminated, the indicator goes out
and cassette can be loaded.
Action: Leave the power ON and wait until
the waraning message goes out.
D1
D2
:
601 601
6
6
0
:
Corresponding menu switches
502 CHARA V POSITION
505 REMAIN ENABLE
0
:
No. Menu switch name
601 V BLANK MASK
Setting
Set value
Behavior: Cassette ejected.
Action: Use Digital-S cassette tape.
06
08
1
1
INVALID ERROR
S-VHS/VHS cassette in use.
Tape tension abnormal.
11
11
0
1
OFF
ON
0
1
2
DISABLE
ENABLE
ON WITH 0.5H
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
SUP TENSION
FAILURE
(AUTO OFF)
Behavior: Cassette ejected.
Action: Load the cassette again.
32
32
1~
2
FAILURE LOADING
Tape loading not possible.
Tape unloading not possible.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
33
33
1~
2
FAILURE UNLOADING
(AUTO OFF)
144
145
Refer to “1.8 WARNING DETECTION CIRCUIT” on page 1.12 of the service manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 TROUBLESHOOTING
14 TROUBLESHOOTING
14-1 WARNINGS WITH INDICATORS
14-2 TROUBLES NOT TO BE WARNED BY INDICATORS
Symptoms
Not operable
Cause
Action
Warning
code
On-screen display
Warningcode information
Behavior and actions to be taken
● The [REMOTE] button is set to “Remote”.
● Menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION
LOCK > set to“ ON”
● Set [REMOTE] button to “LOCAL”.
● Set Menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION
LOCK> to “OFF”.
● Press [MENU] button to restore normal
mode.
41 1
(AUTO OFF)
CASSETTE EJECT
FAILURE
Cassette does not come
out in Eject.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action:
Behavior: Cassette ejected.
Action: If no abnormality is found in tape,
reload the cassette.
Turn the power off and then on.
56 1~
56 9
TAPE DEFECTIVE
Tape defect.
Tape loose
● Menu setting mode entered
Behavior: Tape is rewound. If tape end is still
detected 3 seconds later, cassette
is ejected.
57 1~
57 2
END LEADER
DETECTION
Tape end sensor abnormal.
Not recordable
● Protective slider on the cassette not at
“REC”
● Menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> is set
to “VID-ON” or “AUD-ON”.
● Set cassette’s protective slider to “REC”.
● Set menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> to
“OFF”.
Action:
Reload the cassette.
58 1~
58 2
BEGIN LEADER
DETECTION
Tape beginning sensor
abnormal.
Behavior: Tape is fast-forwarded. If tape
begin is still detected 3 seconds
later, cassette is ejected.
● S-VHS/VHS cassette in use
● S-VHS/VHS cassette not acceptable
Playback impossible
Action:
Reload the cassette.
● Monitor not connected to [LINE2-SUPER
OUT]
● [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel set
● Connect monitor to [LINE2-SUPER OUT].
● Set [ON SCREEN] switch to ON.
On-screen display does
not come up
70 1
(AUTO OFF)
DRUM MOTOR
FAILURE
Drum stops motion.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
to OFF.
71 1
(AUTO OFF)
CAPSTAN MOTOR
FAILURE
Capstan stops its motion.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
● The heads are dirty.
● Clean the heads as instructed on page 11.
Noise appears on part of
the playback picture.
72 1~
72 8
(AUTO OFF)
SUP REEL MOTOR
FAILURE
Supply reel motor motion
abnormal.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
● Menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING>
set to “OFF”.
● Set menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACK-
ING> to “ON”.
73 1~
73 8
TU REEL MOTOR
FAILURE
Takeup reel motor motion
abnormal.
Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible.
Action: Turn the power off and then on.
If noise appears when set to “ON”, set to
“OFF” and perform manual tracking
adjustment.
(AUTO OFF)
● Menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> set to
“NO CONCEAL” or “NO CORRECTION”
● Set menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> to
“NORMAL”.
If there are any abnormalities when the self-diagnostics run after the power is turned on, the following warning indications are
shown. Self-diagnostics are executed when menu switch No. 357 <DIAG AT POWER ON> is set to “ON”. The warning code is
shown in 6 digits. “ x ” mark shows unspecified.
● CTL counter does not run on a non-
recorded section of the tape as no CTL
signal is recorded on such a section.
● Counter is in Menu Switch Setting mode.
Tape counter does not run.
80xxxx
CPU BUS FAILURE
EEPROM FAILURE
SYSCON REF FAILURE
Signal communication
between VCR’s micro-
processors abnormal.
Behavior: Only warning indicator is active.
Action: Consult your local JVC dealer.
● Press [MENU] button and enter Tape
Counter mode.
On-screen display
820100
820300
EEPROM signal
communication in VCR
abnormal.
● Menu switch No. 00D <MENU LOCK> is
set to “ON”.
● Set menu switch No. 00D <MENU LOCK>
to “OFF”.
Menu setting cannot be
changed.
DIAG WARNING 800400
CPU BUS FAILURE
840100
850100
System controller reference
signal failure.
M/S REF
FAILURE
Mechanical controller
reference signal failure.
Input signal cannot be
switched.
● Menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT
SAFETY> is set to “ON”.
● Set menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SE-
LECT SAFETY> to “OFF” or press the
signal switch while pressing the [SHIFT]
button.
(PUSH MENU KEY)
860100
C0xxxx
TC REF FAILURE
Time code reference failure.
MECHA(NO TAPE)
FAILURE
*1 Abnormal mechanical
operation.
When the MENU button is pressed, the
indication goes out.
● The optional SA-D95U digital interface
board is not installed.
● Install the SA-D95U. Otherwise, digital
signals cannot be selected.
*
Serial digital signals are used in conformity
with SMPTE259M for video and with AES/
EBU for audio.
● Menu switch No. 374 <MENU OPEN
SAFETY> is set to “ON”.
● Set menu switch No. 374 <MENU OPEN
SAFETY> to “OFF” or press the [MENU]
button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.
The Menu Switch
Setting mode cannot be
engaged.
*1 If the C02XXX indicator appears when the
power is turned ON it means that
condensation has occurred. Press the
[MENU] button until the indicator goes out.
Once the indicator has gone out, you can
operate the unit as usual.
● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC)
REC> is set to “OFF” and menu switch No.
451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “OFF”
or “TC”.
● Set menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC)
REC> to “ON” or menu switch No. 451
<VITC OUT SELECT> to “SUB TC”.
During playback, the on-
screen sub time code
indication does not
advance.
● Sub time code is not recorded normally.
146
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15 APPENDIX
15 APPENDIX
15-1 Operation Button Combinations
15-2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
15-3 INDEX
A.
N.
REC+PLAY
REC+HOLD
Starts recording
Starts recording current
adjustment (top menu 00E)
Sets the top menu (00A — 00D)
(SET)
1.07x playback
0.93x playback
STILL — 2x playback
Variable playback (0.9x to 1.1x
playback)
SA-D95U Digital Interface Board
Adjustment ............................................................ 118
Assemble editing................................................... 104
Audio emphasis....................................................... 74
Audio input connectors............................................19
Audio input switch ................................................... 24
Audio monitor switch ............................................... 14
Audio output connectors ......................................... 20
Audio recording level............................................... 71
Audio split editing .................................................. 112
Audio V. fade function ............................................. 80
Non-drop frame ....................................................... 97
Install in the BR-D95U. This is used to input and
output video and audio digital signals.
O.
SET+HOLD
Optional equipment ............................................... 148
Operation buttons.................................................... 12
Operation mode lock ............................................... 65
PLAY+FF
PLAY+REW
PLAY+ jog dial
PLAY+ search dial
Rack Mount Adapter SA-K67
P.
Power switch ........................................................... 12
Pre-read function .................................................. 115
Preview switcher ................................................... 116
Program playback ................................................... 85
SA-K67 is a rack mount adapter used to mount this
unit on a 19" EIA standard rack.
SEARCH+ jog dial
Changes menu switch setting
value (menu switch setting)
Changes time code data (time
code setting)
Ⅲ
Mount rail & bracket
C.
Cassette tape .......................................................... 11
Channel condition indicator..................................... 22
Color frame servo setting ...................................... 105
Condensation .......................................................... 10
Counter memory ..................................................... 86
Counter switch ........................................................21
Changes fixed time data (top
menu 00F)
Starts head cleaning
(No tape)
Registers counter memory point
Starts counter search
Starts fixed time cue up
Variable mode (Only the player
during swap editing)
Registers the IN point
Registers the OUT point
Duration display
Cancels the IN point
Cancels the OUT point
Cues the IN point
Cues the OUT point
Corrects the IN point
Corrects the OUT point
Corrects the duration
Registers the audio split point (IN
point)
Indicates the audio split point (IN
point)
Corrects the audio split point (IN
point)
Cancels the audio split point (IN
point)
Review
Last edit
Switches input signal when
menu switch No.371<INPUT
SELECT SAFETY> is set to “ON”.
Opens the menu switch setting
display when menu switch No.
374 <MENU OPEN SAFETY> is
set to “ON”.
ON/OFF switching of the counter
mode (user bits)
Recorder and player
R.
When mounting the unit on a rack with the SA-
K67, a mount rail and mount bracket are also
required.
Recording current adjustment ................................. 38
Reference sync signal............................................. 25
Remote connector................................................... 20
Remote button.........................................................14
Repeat playback ..................................................... 86
STOP+STANDBY+
REW+FF
SET+RESET
SET+PREROLL
SHIFT+PREROLL
SHIFT+SEARCH
Recommended models:
● Acuryde Co., Ltd. 2038-22 (mount rail)
BK2038 (bracket)
D.
S.
Diagnosis connector................................................ 18
Direct access........................................................... 33
Drop frame ..............................................................98
Dubbing loop function ........................................... 122
Search/jog dial ........................................................ 13
Simplified playback speed adjustment function ...... 81
Simultaneous operation .......................................... 90
Slow play................................................................. 24
Standby ON/OFF .................................................... 16
Striping rec function ................................................ 94
Subcarrier phase adjustment ................................ 121
Sub code ............................................................... 102
Sub time code display ............................................. 96
Sub time code playback ........................................ 102
Sub time code recording ....................................... 102
Swap editing ......................................................... 107
Synchronized running mode ................................... 81
IN+ENTRY
OUT+ENTRY
IN+OUT
Ⅲ
Installation
1. Secure the rack mount adapter to the VCR with 6
M4 screws.
2. Secure the slide rail inner member to the VCR with
6 M4 screws.
3. Mount the slide rail outer members on the front
and rear ends of the rack using the bracket.
4. Pull out the rails in the slide rail outer members
until you hear a click.
5. Fit the right and left slide rails on the VCR into the
pulled-out rails and push them in together. The
rails will be blocked by right and left springs, so
press the springs with your fingers and push the
VCR further in.
IN+CANCEL
OUT+CANCEL
IN+PREROLL
OUT+PREROLL
IN+jog dial
OUT+jog dial
IN+OUT+jog dial
SHIFT+IN+ENTRY
E.
Editing system phase adjustment ......................... 117
Error conceal........................................................... 80
Error correction ....................................................... 80
Extra line playback ..................................................88
Extra line recording ................................................. 87
F.
SHIFT+IN
Fine meter mode button .......................................... 13
Fixed time cue up function ...................................... 91
SHIFT+IN+jog dial
SHIFT+IN+CANCEL
T.
H.
Time code display ................................................... 96
Time code generator setting buttons ...................... 18
Time code playback .............................................. 101
Time code presetting............................................... 97
Time code recording ............................................... 99
Time code setting switch section ............................ 18
Top menu ................................................................ 28
Head cleaning .........................................................11
Hour meter ..............................................................39
SHIFT+PREVIEW
SHIFT+AUTO EDIT
SHIFT+input video
signal or audio signal
select button
Precautions
● Do not use screws 8 mm or longer to secure the
rack mount adapter and slide rail inner members to
the VCR, as doing so may damage the printed
circuit boards inside the VCR.
● The handle on the rack mount adapter is only for
sliding the VCR in and out. Do not lift the VCR with
this handle.
When installing the VCR in a rack, make sure there
is sufficient clearance above and below the VCR for
heat radiation.
● Some racks may require that you mount the slide
rails in a particular way. If you have any questions,
consult the rack dealer.
I.
Insert editing.......................................................... 104
SHIFT+MENU
L.
Last edit................................................................. 113
U.
M.
User page................................................................ 34
User bit auto preset function ................................... 63
SHIFT+COUNTER
PLAYER+RECORDER
SHIFT+STANDBY
●
Main code..............................................................101
Masking setting ....................................................... 64
Match frame ............................................................ 58
Meter mode setting button ...................................... 15
Menu switch list ....................................................... 40
Menu switch setting................................................. 28
Menu switch setting button...................................... 15
Menu switch setting contents .................................. 43
Monitor output connector section ............................ 26
Motion memory function ........................................ 114
Mute/alarm condition display................................... 24
Multi cue-up function ............................................... 92
V.
simultaneous operation mode
Switches the edit on-screen
display ON/OFF
Variable-motion editing ......................................... 113
Variable slow playback ........................................... 83
Video control connector .......................................... 27
Video input connectors ........................................... 25
Video input switch ................................................... 14
Video phase adjustment........................................ 118
SHIFT+RECORDER
CANCEL+AUTO EDIT
Activates the learn function
To cancel the player and recorder
edit points as well as the audio
split point:
SHIFT+REC
Open the<STRIPING REC MENU>
W.
SHIFT+P. PLAY
P. PLAY+PLAY
P. PLAY+ jog dial
Program Playback mode
Starts the program playback.
Sets the program playback speed.
Warning................................................................. 145
148
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 SPECIFICATIONS
16 SPECIFICATIONS
ⅷ General
Format
Type D-9 (Digital S)
Tape width
12.65 mm
Tape speed
57.737 mm/sec. (525), 57.795 mm/s (625)
NTSC standard (525), PAL standard (625)
429 mm (W) x 189 mm (H) x 569 mm (D) (16-15/16" x 7-1/2" x 22-7/16")
Approx. 22 kg (48.5 lbs.)
Signal format
Unit: mm
Dimensions
Weight
Power consumption
Power supply
Approx. 1.7 A to 0.8 A
AC 110 V to 240 V ~, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(Record/play) Approx. 104 min.
Approx. 3 min.
Record/play time (w/DS-104)
REW/FF time (w/DS-104)
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Operating humidity
ⅷ Video signal
5˚C to 40˚C (41˚F to 104˚F)
-20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F)
30% to 80%RH
Input
Composite
Component
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Y: 1 Vp-p/R-Y, B-Y, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Output Composite
Component
Y: 1 Vp-p/R-Y, B-Y, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
0.43 Vp-p (B.B) (525), 0.45 Vp-p (B.B) (625), 75 ohms, unbalanced
External input
Sampling frequency
Quantization
Y: 13.5 MHz, R-Y/B-Y: 6.75 MHz
8 bits
429
174
15
Frequency range
Y: 0 - 5.75 MHz, +1.0 dB/-3.0 dB (analog component in/out)
R-Y/B-Y: 0 - 2.75 MHz, +1.0 dB/-3.0 dB
S/N
More than 50 dB (analog composite in/out)
More than 55 dB (analog component in/out)
More than 60 dB (digital in/analog component out)
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BR-D95U
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO INPUT
/
AUDIO MONITOR SELECT
POWER
SDI
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
SIF
ON
I
AUDIO
MONITOR
A
E
S
/
E
B
U
LINE
CPN
L
A
N
A
L
O
G
COENT DIGL
R
OFF
O
Variable Motion
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4/TRACKING
SEARCH
VAR
PLAYER RECORDER
R
P
R
P
R
P
R
P
C
O
U
N
T
E
R
R
E
S
E
T
VCON
REMOTE
C
AU
T
T
L
O
T
C
U
FF
B
P
D
F
A
S
D
E
R
V
V
.V
O
A
C
R
F
P
G
E
E
N
1
R
6
E
:
M
9
A
OT
P
E
5
62
2
5
5
CONDITION
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
dB OVER dB
ⅷ Audio signal
0
0
0
0
O
.
R
E
B
/
E
UB
+4
+4
+4
+4
–10
–10
–10
–10
PB
+2
+2
+2
+2
P.PLAY
MENU
REC
SET
HOLD
PB/EE
0
0
0
0
–20
–20
–20
–20
STILL
–2
–2
–2
–2
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
–30
–40
H
M
S
F
–4
–4
–4
–4
–60
–60
–60
–60
ASSEM
VIDEO
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
EJECT
PLAY
P
A
U
SE/S
T
I
L
L
X-1
X1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Input
Line input
-20/-6/0/+4 dBs, high impedance, balanced
PHONES
TRACKING
REC
INSERT
IN
ENTRY
OUT
TC
TOP
VIDEO
STOP
AUDIO
FF
PULL FOR VARIABLE
PLAY
METER MODE
FINE TRACKING
STAND BY
REW
CANCEL PREVIEW
REVIEW
AUTO EDIT
PREROLL
USER
P
ULL
P
ULL
R
ELEA
SE
R
E
L
E
ASE
Output Line output
Monitor output
-6/0/+4 dBs, low impedance, balanced
SHIFT
SERVO/SYS
TIME CODE
ON SCREEN
OTHERS
REV
FWD
-6/0/+4 dBs, low impedance, balanced
Headphone
-∞ to -14 dBs, 8 ohms
48 kHz
Sampling frequency
Quantization
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.
16 bits
No. of channels
Frequency response
Dynamic range
Wow & flutter
ⅷ Time code
4
20 Hz to 20 kHz
85 dB or more
Below a measurable value
LTC input
0
0
6 dBs, high impedance, balanced
3 dBs, low impedance, balanced
LTC output
ⅷ Accessories
Power cable (A Type: 125 V, 7 A / C Type: 250 V, 10 A)
Repeat Tye x 1
ⅷ When the optional SA-D95U is installed
Serial video/audio input
Serial video/audio output
Digital audio input
Conforming to SMPTE259M/CCIR656-III
Conforming to SMPTE259M/CCIR656-III, 800 mVp-p 10%
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, conforms to AES/EBU standard
Digital audio output
1 Vp-p/3 Vp-p or more (switchable with built-in switch), 75 ohms, unbalanced,
conforms to AES/EBU standard
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.
150
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|